730LUC AlarmParameter Manual

MITSUBISHI CNC
730LUC
Alarm/Parameter Manual
IB-1500126(ENG)-A
MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of the respective companies.
Introduction
This manual is the alarm/parameter guide required to use the MITSUBISHI CNC 730LUC.
This manual is prepared on the assumption that your machine is provided with all of the MITSUBISHI
CNC 730LUC functions. Confirm the functions available for your NC before proceeding to operation by
referring to the specification issued by the machine tool builder.
Notes on Reading This Manual
(1) This manual explains general parameters as viewed from the NC.
For information about each machine tool, refer to manuals issued from the machine tool builder.
If the descriptions relating to "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this manual
and the machine tool builder's instruction manual, the later has priority over the former.
(2) This manual is intended to contain as much descriptions as possible even about special operations.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible.
(3) The "special display unit" explained in this manual is the display unit incorporated by the machine
tool builder, and is not the MELDAS standard display unit.
Caution
If the descriptions relating to the "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this
manual and the machine tool builder’s instruction manual‚ the latter has priority over the former.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered

"impossible".
This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional
functions. Confirm the functions available for your machine before proceeding to operation by
In some NC system versions‚ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screen‚
the machine operates in a different way or some function is not activated.
Precautions for Safety
Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and attached
documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use.
Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is
DANGER mistaken.
When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.
WARNING
When the user may be subject to injuries or when physical damage may occur if
CAUTION handling is mistaken.
Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any
case, important information that must always be observed is described.
DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.
WARNING
Not applicable in this manual.
CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual
If the descriptions relating to the "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this
manual and the machine tool builder's instruction manual‚ the latter has priority over the former.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible.
This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional
functions. Confirm the functions available for your machine before proceeding to operation by
In some NC system versions‚ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screen‚
the machine operates in a different way on some function is not activated.
2. Items related to faults and abnormalities

If the battery low alarm is output, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters to an
input/output device, and then replace the battery. If the BATTERY alarm occurs, the machining
programs, tool data and parameters may be damaged. After replacing the battery, reload each
data item.
[Continued on next page]
CAUTION [Continued]
3. Items related to maintenance

Do not replace the battery while the power is ON.
Do not short-circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose of the spent battery according to local laws.
4. Items related to servo parameters and spindle parameters

Do not adjust or change the parameter settings greatly as operation could become unstable.
In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".
CONTENTS
I Explanation of Alarms
1. Errors During Operation ............................................................................................. 1
1.1 Operation Errors (M01)...........................................................................................................1
1.2 Absolute position return again (M02)....................................................................................16
1.3 Interference check alarm (M03)............................................................................................16
1.4 Interference area alarm (M04)..............................................................................................16
2. Stop Codes................................................................................................................. 17
3. Servo/Spindle Alarms ............................................................................................... 21
4. MCP Alarms ............................................................................................................... 31
4.1 MCP Alarms .........................................................................................................................31
4.2 MCP Warnings .....................................................................................................................35
4.3 Safety Observation Alarms...................................................................................................37
4.4 Safety Observation Warnings...............................................................................................38
5. Messages Related to System ................................................................................... 39
5.1 System Alarms .....................................................................................................................39
5.2 System Warnings .................................................................................................................43
6. Alarms Related to User PLC ..................................................................................... 45
7. Program Errors .......................................................................................................... 47
8. Auxiliary Axis Alarms................................................................................................ 63
II User Parameters
1. Control Parameter ....................................................................................................... 1
2. Axis Parameters .......................................................................................................... 6
3. Setup Parameter .......................................................................................................... 7
III Machine Parameters
1. Basic Specifications Parameters ............................................................................... 1
1.1 Base Axis Parameters ............................................................................................................1
1.2 Base System Parameters .......................................................................................................4
1.3 Base Common Parameters ....................................................................................................9
2. Axis Specification Parameters ................................................................................. 25
3. Zero Point Return Parameters (Reference Position Return).................................. 35
4. Servo Parameters ...................................................................................................... 38
4.1 List of Parameters (MDS-D/DH Series) ................................................................................38
4.2 Supplement (MDS-D/DH Series) ..........................................................................................71
4.2.1 D/A Output No. ...............................................................................................................71
4.2.2 Electronic Gears .............................................................................................................72
4.2.3 Lost Motion Compensation.............................................................................................73
4.3 List of Parameters (Intelligent Servomotor) ..........................................................................74
4.4 Supplement (Intelligent Servomotor) ....................................................................................87
4.4.1 Command polarity ..........................................................................................................87
4.4.2 Limitations to electronic gear setting value ....................................................................87
4.4.3 Intelligent Servomotor D/A Output Function ...................................................................88
5. Spindle Parameters ................................................................................................... 91
5.1 Spindle NC Parameters ........................................................................................................91
5.2 Spindle Parameters ............................................................................................................100
5.3 Supplement.........................................................................................................................125
5.4 Spindle-Type Servo Parameters.........................................................................................126
6. PLC Constants ......................................................................................................... 127
6.1 PLC Constants....................................................................................................................127
6.2 PLC Integrated Timer .........................................................................................................128
6.3 PLC Counter .......................................................................................................................128
6.4 PLC Constants....................................................................................................................129
6.5 Selecting the PLC Bit..........................................................................................................129
7. Custom Variables .................................................................................................... 132
8. Macro List................................................................................................................. 133
9. Position Switch Parameter ..................................................................................... 136
10. Machine Error Compensation............................................................................... 139
10.1 Function Outline................................................................................................................139
10.2 Setting Compensation Data..............................................................................................142
10.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis ............................................................144
10.4 Example in Using a Rotation Axis as the Base Axis.........................................................147
11. Absolute Position Setting ..................................................................................... 148
I Explanation of Alarms
1. Errors During Operation
1.1 Operation Errors (M01)

M01 Message Alarms resulting from incorrect operation by the operator during NC operation
and alarms resulting from the machine fault are displayed.
The numbers given in the table can be referred to on the Alarm list screen
(Diagnosis group).
Error
Message Details Remedy
No.
0001 Dog overrun • When the spindle returned to the • Increase the length of the near-point
reference point, the near-point dog.
detecting limit switch was not • Reduce the speed at which the
stopped by the dog but it overran the spindle returns to the reference
dog instead. point.
(Note) This error may not occur
depending on the system.
0002 Some ax • One of the axes did not pass the • Move the machine by an amount
does not pass Z-phase of the detector on the initial equivalent to one or more rotations
Z phase return of the machine to the reference of the detector in the reverse
point after the power was turned ON. direction to that of the reference
point, and proceed with reference
point return again.
0003 Reference • When returning manually to the • An AXIS SELECTION key
point return reference point, the direction of the corresponding to the wrong direction
illegal return differs from the axis movement has been selected. The error is
direction which has been designated released by feeding the axis in the
by the AXIS SELECTION key. correct direction.
0004 External • The external interlock function has • Since the interlock function has been
interlock axis been activated (the input signal is activated, it must first be released
exists "OFF"), and one of the axes is before operation is resumed.
interlocked as a result. • Check the sequence on the machine
side.
• Check for breakage in the interlock
signal wire.
0005 Internal • An internal interlock status is • Since the servo "OFF" function has
interlock axis established. been activated, it must first be
exists released.
• An axis for which axis removal is
valid has been commanded. Carry
out the correct operation.
• The manual skip is designated in the
same direction as when this turned
ON. Carry out the correct operation.
I-1
Error
No.
0006 H/W stroke • The stroke end function is activated • Since the stroke end limit switch has
end axis (the input signal is "OFF") and one of been activated (the stroke end status
exists the axes is in the stroke-end status. has been established), move the
machine in reverse by operating it
manually.
• Check for breakage or disconnection
in the stroke end signal wire.
• Check for a failure in the limit switch.
0007 S/W stroke • The stored stroke limit I or II function • Since the machine is in the stroke
end axis has been activated. end status, move it in reverse by
exists operating it manually.
• Reset the stored stroke limit in the
parameters.
0008 Chuck/ • The chuck/tail-stock barrier function • After resetting the alarm by resetting
tailstock was valid, and the stroke end the NC, move the machine in the
barrier valid occurred on an axis. reverse direction.
0009 Ref point • When return to the 1st reference • Execute return to the 1st reference
return not point had not been completed, return point again.
completed to the 2nd reference point was
executed.
0010 R-pnt ret invld • The operation mode was changed to • Select an operation mode other than
at tool retract the reference point return mode the reference point return mode.
while in the tool retract return mode.
0011 Door open • The door open signal is being input. • Close the door.
signal ON • Turn OFF the door open signal
(Y488).
0012 Auto zero pt • When initializing the absolute • Reset the Absolute position
init not valid position, the machine zero point is at parameter "1202 Ref position offset"
a position exceeding the pushing and the Zero (Reference) point
point. return parameters "2113 to 2116
• The Basic specification parameter #1_rfp to #4_rfp" and "2107 dir(–)"
"1011 abson" is not set to "2". so that the pushing point is not
• The Absolute position set parameter exceeded.
manual zero point initialization mode • Set the Basic specification parameter
is valid. 1 "1011 abson" to "2".
• The Absolute position set parameter • If the Absolute position set parameter
"1205 No stopper" is set to "1". manual zero point initialization mode
is valid, turn the NC power ON again.
• Set the Absolute position set
parameter "1205 No stopper" to "0".
0024 R-pnt ret invld • The reference point return signal • After the absolute position detection
at abs pos was input while the absolute position alarm is released, return to reference
alm detection alarm was occurring. point can be made.
0025 R-pnt ret invld • The reference point return signal • Carry out reference point return after
at zero pt ini was input while carrying out zero the zero point initialization is
point initialization of the absolute completed.
position detection system.
I-2
Error
No.
0101 Ope mode • No operation mode is selected, or • Check for breakage in the input
non-selected/ two or more operation modes are mode signal wire.
dupli. selected. • Check for a failure in the MODE
SELECT switch.
• Check the sequence program.
0102 Cutting • The "CUTTING FEED OVERRIDE" • The error is released by setting the
override zero switch on the machine operation “CUTTING FEED OVERRIDE”
panel is set to "0". switch to any position except “0”.
• If the “CUTTING FEED OVERRIDE”
switch has been set to any position
except “0”, check whether the signal
wire has been short-circuited.
0103 External feed • The "MANUAL FEEDRATE" switch • The error is released by setting the
rate zero on the machine operation panel has "MANUAL FEEDRATE" switch on
been set to "0" when the machine is the machine operation panel to any
in the JOG mode and automatic dry position except "0".
run mode. • If the "MANUAL FEEDRATE" switch
has been set to any position except
"0", check whether the signal wire
has been short-circuited.
0105 Spindle stop • The spindle was stopped when the • Rotate the spindle. Establish the dry
synchronous feed command was run mode unless a workpiece is
input. being cut.
• Check for disconnection in the
spindle encoder cable.
• Check the connections of the spindle
encoder connectors.
• Check the spindle encoder pulse.
0106 Handle feed • An axis which does not exist in the • Check for breakage in the handle
ax No. illegal specifications has been designated feed axis selection signal wire.
for handle feed. • Review the sequence program.
• The handle feed axis has not been • Check the number of axes listed in
selected. the specifications.
0107 Spindle • The spindle speed has exceeded the • Reduce the commanded spindle
rotation clamp speed of the axis when the speed.
speed over thread cutting command was issued.
0108 Fixed pnt • An axis not defined in the specifica- • Check the fixed point mode feed axis
mode feed ax tions was designated during fixed selection signal wire and fixed point
illegal point mode feed. mode feedrate wire for breakage.
• The fixed point mode feedrate is • Check the fixed point mode feed
illegal. specifications.
0109 Block start • An interlock signal which locks the • Check the sequence program.
interlock block start has been input. • Cancel the block start interlock signal.
0110 Cutting block • An interlock signal which locks the • Check the sequence program.
start interlock cutting block start has been input. • Cancel the cutting block start interlock
signal.
I-3
Error
No.
0115 In reset • Starting was attempted during the • Restart after the reset process is
process reset process. completed.
1001 Selected ax • The feed axis selected in manual • Reset or return the selected feed
used as cross operation is being used by the cross axis to the basic definition axis for
ax machining command issued by a the cross machining command.
different system.
1003 Mov cmnd at • A machine value command was • Check the machining program.
s-impos/ issued to a superimposing axis, or a
synch ilgl movement command was issued to
a slave axis.
1004 S-impos/ • A superimposition command was • Check the machining program.
synch issued to an axis under
command synchronization control.
illegal • A synchronization command was
issued to an axis under
superimposition control.
• A superimposition command, having
three or more levels, was issued.
• A synchronization command, having
two or more levels, was issued.
1005 Illegal G114.n • The G114.n command was issued in • Review the program.
command G114.n mode
1006 Thread • When the thread cutting cycle/ • Readjust the Spindle parameters.
cutting compound thread cutting cycle was • Make sure that the spindle speed
synchro error started while the thread cutting clamp command is not issued in the
spindle rotation speed automatic machining program.
change was selected, the difference
of the automatically changed
command spindle rotation speed
and the spindle actual rotation speed
was not within the tolerable error
width for the spindle rotation speed
automatic change.
1007 Tap cycle • A tap cycle synchronization • Review the machining program.
command command was issued to a related
illegal axis during spindle synchronous
control, tool-spindle control I, II or
III, or peripheral axis synchronous
control.
• The spindle synchronization control
or tool-spindle control I, II or III was
commanded to a spindle in tap cycle
synchronization.
• A tap cycle or tap cycle synchroniza-
tion command was issued to a master
spindle in spindle superimposition
control.
• A tap cycle synchronization (tap
spindle zero point return type)
command was issued to a
superimposition spindle during
spindle superimposition control.
I-4
Error
No.
1008 Teaching • The feedrate calculated during • Follow the teaching procedure again
speed illegal teaching in intersystem synchronous from the beginning.
mode is illegal.
1009 In teaching • The set No. (TGSET) was designated • Stop the setting of the position
data setting while making settings on the screen. control variables on the screen.
1010 No spec: • The teaching mode signal was turned • Check the specifications.
Teaching ON though it was not included in the • Cancel the teaching mode signal.
specifications.
1011 Teaching • The teaching command was issued • Check the machining program.
invalid at mirr during the mirror image.
image
1012 Spindle • Use of a spindle cut off with the • Check the machining program.
detached spindle cutoff signal was attempted. • Check the spindle changeover
sequence.
1013 C ax commnd • An automatic movement command • Check the machining program.
invalid at was issued to the C axis during the
hobbing tool-spindle synchronization control
(hobbing) mode.
1014 GB spindle • A forward run, reverse run, orientation • Check the ladder program.
synchro or C-axis servo ON command was
signal OFF issued to the reference spindle while
the G/B spindle synchronization
signal was OFF.
• The G/B spindle synchronization
signal was turned OFF during a
forward run, reverse run, orientation
or C-axis servo ON command.
1015 Spindle type • A spindle (analog spindle) not • Check the parameters.
error serially connected was used for the • Change the analog spindle to a
master spindle or G/B spindle. serially connected spindle.
1016 GB spindle • The master spindle's spindle NC • Check smcp_no.
connection parameter "3032 smcp_no" setting • Check the connection of the spindle
illegal value is larger than the G/B spindle drive unit and MCP card.
setting value.
• The master spindle's spindle drive
unit and G/B spindle's spindle drive
unit are not connected to the same
MCP card (QX722 or QX721).
I-5
Error
No.
1017 G128/G129 During the axis movement synchronous • Check the program.
axis posn superimposition command (G128, • Check the details designated for the
illegal G129): DDBS conditions.
• The master axis moved from the
direction of the synchronous
superimposition completion position.
• The distance between the master
axis and synchronous
superimposition axis is already within
the relative distance.
• When commanding with DDBS, the
synchronous superimposing axis is
not within the end position from the
synchronous superimposition start
position.
1018 G128/G129 • During the axis movement • Check the program.
command synchronous superimposition
illegal command (G128, G129), a
command with which the
synchronous superimposing axis
exceeds the synchronous
superimposition completion position
was issued.
1019 G128 axis During the axis movement synchronous • Check the program.
locked superimposition command (G128, • This will be canceled when the
G129): synchronous superimposition axis or
• When the synchronous reference axis is stopped.
superimposition mode was started,
the synchronous superimposing axis
or master axis was moving.
• When the synchronous
superimposition mode was
completed, the synchronous
superimposing axis or master axis
was moving.
1020 G128 axis • During the axis movement • Check the program.
locked synchronous superimposition
command (G128, G129), the
synchronous superimposing axis
was in the machine lock or interlock
state.
1021 GB SP sync: • The G/B spindle synchronization • Check the ladder program.
Phase mem phase memory signal was turned
sgnl ilgl ON while the master spindle or G/B
spindle was rotating.
• The G/B spindle synchronization
phase memory signal was turned ON
while the G/B spindle synchronization
signal was OFF.
I-6
Error
No.
1022 GB SP sync: • The G/B spindle synchronization • Check the ladder program.
Phase set phase alignment signal was turned
sgnl ilgl ON while the master spindle or G/B
spindle was stopped.
1023 GB SP sync: • When the G/B spindle • Check the ladder program.
Z phase not synchronization phase memory
pass signal was ON, the master spindle or
G/B spindle’s Z-phase was not
passed.
1024 Sub-part • A subsystem command was issued • Check the ladder program.
system call for a system that was not in the
illegal subsystem operation mode.
1025 Crss mach ilgl • The subsystem was started or • Check the machining program.
at sub-sys stopped with the cross command
call when the basic axis configuration
was not established.
1026 SP-C ax ctrl • Other spindle position control • Command only one of the functions.
runs (synchronous tap/spindle
independntly synchronization (G114.n)/spindle
orientation) was commanded during
Spindle/C axis control, or Spindle/C
axis control was commanded during
other spindle position control.
1027 C-surface ctrl • The constant surface speed • Issue only one of the commands.
invld at taping command was issued to a spindle in
the tap cycle/synchronous tap cycle,
or a tap cycle/synchronous tap cycle
command was issued to a spindle in
the constant surface speed control.
1028 GB SP sync: The G/B spindle synchronization • Review the ladder program.
Cancel sgnl temporary cancel signal was turned
illegal ON/OFF when the master spindle and
G/B spindle were in one of the
following modes.
• During rotation (when not stopped)
• During tap cycle synchronization
mode
• During spindle synchronization
mode
• During tool-spindle synchronization I
(polygon machining) mode
• During tool-spindle synchronization
II (hobbing) mode
• During spindle superimposition mode
• During spindle C axis control C axis
mode
• During orientation/indexing
I-7
Error
No.
1100 Sub-system • A sub-system that can be started is • Check the program.
start not not remaining when the sub-system (Focus on process timing)
possible is called.
1101 Axis change • When the arbitrary axis exchange • Check the program.
not possible command was issued, the declared (Focus on process timing)
axis was in a status unable to be
exchanged.
1102 Spindle cond • In the spindle status check function, • Check the program.
check time the designated spindle did not reach
exceed the designated speed, and
exceeded the designated check
time.
1103 G156 • The random superimposition • Check the machining program.
command at command was issued from an
illegal system external source including
superimposing axes or random
superimposition master axes. Or the
random superimposition cancel
command was issued from an
external source including the
random superimposing axes.
1104 Prphral/ • When setting the axis No. for the • Check the ladder circuit.
synchro ax peripheral axis synchronous control,
No. ilgl the slave axis and master axis were
set to the same number, or a number
that does not exist in the system was
set.
1105 Collision • The collision detection function • Check the machining program.
detect cmnd (G161) was commanded from
illegal several systems.
1106 Spindle synch • The spindle synchronization phase • Check the machining program.
phase calc ilgl alignment command was issued • Check the ladder circuit.
while the spindle synchronization
phase calculation request signal was
valid.
1107 Now feed rate • The commanded feedrate exceeded • Check the machining program.
clamped the clamp speed set in the
parameters.
1108 SP clamped • When a tap cycle or synchronous tap • Check the program.
at cycle was commanded to a
superimpose superimposing axis, the actual
tap rotation speed of the superimposing
spindle exceeded the spindle clamp
speed.
• The synchronous tap cycle was
commanded when a rotation
command was not input for the
master spindle or superimposing
spindle.
I-8
Error
No.
1109 Base SP • A constant surface speed command • Check the program.
C-surface was issued to the master spindle
invld at tap when the tap cycle or synchronous
tap cycle was being executed with
the superimposing spindle.
• During constant surface speed
control of the master spindle, the tap
cycle or synchronous tap cycle
command was issued to the
superimposing spindle.
1110 Ax exchange • An arbitrary axis exchange • Check the program.
not possible command for which axis exchange is
not possible or an arbitrary axis
exchange return command was
issued.
1111 Now ax • The movement command following • Check the program.
detached or the arbitrary axis superimposition
servo off command, a movement command
following the superimposition/
synchronization control, or a
movement command following the
peripheral axis synchronization
control was issued during the axis
removal mode or during servo OFF.
1112 Mirror image • The mirror image was turned ON for • Check the mirror image signal in the
command a superimposition/synchronous axis PLC Interface.
illegal or milling control axis. • Check the Axis parameter mirror
• The external mirror image and image.
parameter mirror image were turned • Check the program.
ON simultaneously.
1113 T-leng meas • Measurement of an axis that had not • Carry out reference point return
ax not retn returned to the reference point was before measuring.
(TLM2) attempted during manual tool length
measurement 2.
1114 Tool No. not • The designated tool number was not • Designate a tool number within the
found (TLM2) within the number of tool sets during number of tool sets.
manual tool length measurement 2.
1115 Compen ax • Measurement of two or more axes • Check the axis to be measured.
illegal (TLM2) was attempted simultaneously during
manual tool length measurement 2.
• The measured axis was not the tool
offset target axis.
1116 Sensor No. • Measurement without designating • Confirm the sensor No. designated
not specified the sensor No. was attempted during for the parameter manual tool length
(TLM2) manual tool length measurement 2. measurement 2.
I-9
Error
No.
1117 Inclined ctrl • Automatic dogless, manual • Check the ladder circuit.
manual mode reference point return, manual feed
ilgl or a manual mode other than handle
was selected in the actual axis mode.
• Incremental feed, manual skip or
automatic dogless was selected
during the orthogonal mode.
• Automatic handle interruption was
selected during manual-automatic
simultaneous operation.
1118 G170/G171 • The G170/G171 coordinate • Check the machining program.
cood not changeover command was issued
changed during start point designation wait,
end point designation wait,
miscellaneous function output during
axis movement wait, or during
superimposition/synchronous/
peripheral axis synchronous control.
1119 Inclined ctrl • A cross command, arbitrary axis • Check the machining program.
axis illegal exchange command or
superimposition/synchronous/
peripheral axis synchronous control
command was issued to an inclined
master axis or inclined axis.
• A synchronous tap command tap axis
was commanded for an inclined axis.
1120 Disapprove • The hypothetical coordinate Check whether the hypothetical
coordinate coordinates cannot be set when the coordinate target axis is in any of the
conver hypothetical coordinate setting following states. Remove the cause if
command is issued. found.
• Hypothetical coordinate target axis is
related to control axis synchronous
control, control axis superimposition
control, arbitrary axis
superimposition control, peripheral
axis synchronous control or
synchronous control during axis
movement.
• The other axis in the set of
hypothetical coordinate target axes
is in the automatic/ manual machine
lock state.
• The hypothetical coordinate target
axis is in the servo OFF state.
axis has been removed.
axis has not completed reference
point return.
axis is in the automatic handle
interrupt mode or manual/automatic
simultaneous mode.
axis is in the constant torque control
or proportional torque pressing
control state.
I - 10
Error
No.
1121 Invalid during • A command that can be issued only One of the following commands was
coord conver in the hypothetical coordinate cancel issued to the hypothetical coordinate
state was issued while setting the target axis while setting the
hypothetical coordinates. Remove the
hypothetical coordinates.
cause.
• Manual mode (jog, incremental,
handle)
The hypothetical coordinate target
axis making up the set exist in
separate part systems
Select the feed axis simultaneously
for the two hypothetical coordinate
target axes
• Manual random feed
• Manual reference point return
• Absolute position establish
• Automatic/manual machine lock
Machine lock signal ON for only one
of the hypothetical coordinate target
axes
• Automatic handle interrupt
• Manual/automatic simultaneous
• Control axis synchronous control
command (G125)
• Control axis superimposition control
command (G126)
• Random superimposition control
command (G156)
• Peripheral axis synchronization
command
• Servo OFF signal OFF
• Axis removal signal ON
• Constant torque control
• Proportional torque pressing control
1122 Disapprove • The tool axis direction tool length Check whether the axis targeted for
chage TDO offset cannot be set when the tool tool axis direction tool length offset is
mode axis direction tool length offset is in the following state, and remove the
cause.
commanded.
• The axis targeted for tool axis
direction tool length offset is not in
the command system.
direction tool length offset is in
control axis synchronous control,
control axis superimposition control
or synchronous control during axis
movement.
• One or two of the axes targeted for
tool axis direction tool length offset is
in the machine lock state.
direction tool length offset is in the
servo OFF state.
direction tool length offset is
removed.
direction tool length offset has not
completed reference point return.
I - 11
Error
No.
1123 Cmnd invalid • A command that can be issued only One of the following commands was
during TDO when tool axis direction tool length issued to the axis targeted for tool axis
mode offset is canceled was commanded direction tool length offset during the
during the tool length direction tool tool axis direction tool length offset
length offset mode. modal. Cancel the tool axis direction
tool length offset modal, or remove the
cause.
• Manual reference point return
• When the automatic machine lock
signal has not been selected for
even one of the axes targeted for
machine lock tool axis direction tool
length offset
• Cross machining command (G110)
• Manual skip
• Manual tool length measurement I, II
• Tool retract return
• When the servo OFF signal has not
been selected for even one of the
axes targeted for servo OFF tool axis
direction tool length offset
• When the axis removal signal has
not been selected for even one of the
axes targeted for axis removal tool
axis direction tool length offset
• Control axis synchronous control
command (G125)
• Control axis superimposition control
command (G126)
• Synchronous control command
during axis movement (G128)
I - 12
Error
No.
1125 Program • The program restart mode signal • Turn the program restart mode signal
restart was turned ON when one of the part ON when none of the part systems
impossible systems was in automatic startup. are in automatic startup.
• The program restart mode signal • Turn the program restart mode
was turned ON during the spindle signal ON in a mode other than the
synchronization, the tool-spindle spindle synchronization, the
synchronization mode, the spindle tool-spindle synchronization mode,
superimposition mode, the the spindle superimposition mode,
synchronous tap mode or the tap the synchronous tap mode or the tap
cycle mode. cycle mode.
• The program restart mode signal • Turn the program restart mode signal
was turned ON during reverse run of ON with program check forward run in
program check. a block that exceeds the reverse run
start block.
was turned ON during subsystem signal ON during operation other
operation. than subsystem operation.
• The program restart mode signal • When G28, G30 or G27 is
was turned ON in the next block commanded at the head of the main
when G28, G30 or G27 was program, turn the program restart
commanded at the head of the main mode signal ON in the next or
program. following block.
• The program restart signal was • If subprogram call is commanded at
turned ON in the subprogram’s head the head of the main program, turn
block when subprogram call is the program restart mode signal ON
commanded at the head of the main after the head block of the
program. subprogram.
was turned ON in the head block of signal ON in a block after the main
the main program. program's head block.
was turned ON during automatic ON in a mode other than the
handle interrupt or manual/automatic automatic handle interrupt or manual/
simultaneous mode. automatic simultaneous mode.
was turned ON during MDI operation ON during a mode other than MDI
or PLC interrupt operation. operation or PLC interrupt operation.
• During the program restart mode, • Select the MDI operation mode or
the MDI operation mode or PLC PLC interrupt operation mode after
interrupt operation mode was turning the restart mode interrupt
selected before turning the restart signal ON.
mode interrupt signal was turned
OFF.
• All axes did not return to the restart • Return all axes to the restart
position during automatic operation position.
after the program restart mode.
was turned ON while waiting for signal ON after the synchronization
synchronization during automatic wait state is completed.
operation after the program restart
mode.
I - 13
Error
No.
1126 Sync. Tap • The synchronous tap cycle was • Check the details set for the tap
speed param commanded in the following state. speed parameters.
illegal (1) When the tap speed setting for the
first step was 0 or not within the
setting range.
(2) The setting value of a step is bigger
than the value of a bigger step, or
the setting value of a step is smaller
than the value of a smaller step.
(Except for "0" setting.)
1131 Illegal Ope • When executing the execution type • This alarm is canceled by resetting.
mode in data's machine tool builder macro, When the manual mode is selected,
HSPRGM change over to the manual mode turn the manual mode OFF to reset
was selected (mode changeover, the alarm.
manual/automatic simultaneous,
handle interrupt), or MDI interrupt or
PLC interrupt was selected.
1132 In HSPRGM • Automatic operation was started • This alarm is canceled by resetting.
conversion during a machine tool builder macro Start automatic operation after the
conversion process. machine tool builder macro
conversion is completed.
1133 Axis change • An arbitrary axis exchange • Review the execution type data
invalid in command was issued in an axis program.
HSPRGM change invalid state while executing
execution type data.
1200 GB SP • The target axis was exchanged upon • Check the machining program.
sync:R-pnt issuance of the arbitrary axis
posn illegal exchange command during
interference avoidance G0 speed
control.
• Interference avoidance G0 speed
control was executed during
superimposition or synchronization.
Control axis superimposition was
executed during interference
avoidance G0 speed control.
1201 G182 timeout • G181 command having the same • Check the machining program.
identification No. as G182 command • Check the parameter (#8061).
was not executed within set timeout
time.
I - 14
Error
No.
9097 Position • The difference of the previous • Contact the Service Center.
supervising cycle's feedback position and the
error 3 current cycle's feedback position
exceeded the tolerable range.
• A positional deviation occurred.
9098 Position • The data for the program analysis • Contact the Service Center.
supervising process and interpolation process
error 1 did not match, causing a positional
deviation.
9099 Position • The data for the interpolation process • Contact the Service Center.
supervising and acceleration/deceleration
error 2 process did not match, causing a
positional deviation.
I - 15
1.2 Absolute Position Return Again (M02)
1.2 Absolute Position Return Again (M02)
M02 Abs posn return required again
Details Remedy
The operation mode was changed to the • Select an operation mode other than the reference
reference point return mode while in the retract point return mode.
return mode.
1.3 Interference Check Alarm (M03)
M03 Interfere alarm (command)
Details Remedy
The issued command caused an interference • Release the alarm by a reset operation.
between two devices such as tool turrets. • To move the interfering device further in the
interfering direction, invalidate an interference check
before doing it.
• Refer to the instruction manual issued by the
machine manufacturer for the procedure to invalidate
an interference check.
1.4 Interference Area Alarm (M04)
M04 Interfere alarm (present area)
Details Remedy
Two interfering devices such as tool turrets • Invalidate an interference check, and then move the
entered an interference area. devices.
• Refer to the instruction manual issued by the
machine manufacturer for the procedure to invalidate
an interference check.
I - 16
2. Stop Codes
2. Stop Codes
This code indicates that the NC has stopped for some reason.
T01 Message In this status, automatic operation start cannot be executed when an
attempt is made to execute it from the NC stop status.
The numbers given in the table can be referred to on the Alarm list
screen (Diagnosis group).
Error
No.
0101 Axis in motion • Since one of the axes is in motion, • Try automatic start again after all
automatic start is not possible. axes have stopped.
0102 NC not ready • Automatic start is not possible • Another alarm has been issued and
because the NC ready signal is not the cause should be checked out
supplied. and remedy.
0103 Reset signal • Automatic start is not possible • Set the reset input signal to "OFF".
ON because the reset signal has been • Check for a failure in the reset switch.
input. • Check the sequence program.
0104 Auto • The "FEED HOLD" switch on the • Check the "FEED HOLD" switch.
operation machine operation panel is ON (B contact)
pause signal (valid). • Check for a breakage in the feed
ON hold signal wire.
0105 H/W stroke • Automatic start is not possible • If the stroke end has been reached
end axis because one of the axes has by the axis end, move the axis by
exists reached the stroke end. operating it manually.
• Check for a breakage in the stroke
end signal wire.
• Check for a failure in the stroke end
limit switch.
0106 S/W strok end • Automatic start is not possible • Move the axis manually.
axis exists because one of the axes has • Check the contents of the parameter
reached the stored stroke limit. unless the axis end is at the stored
stroke end.
0107 No operation • The operation mode has not been • Restart after selecting the operation
mode selected. mode.
• Check for a breakage in the
automatic operation mode (memory,
MDI) signal wire.
0108 Operation • Two or more operation modes have • Check for a short-circuit in the mode
mode been selected in error. selection signal wire (memory, MDI).
duplicated • Check for a failure in the switch.
• Restart after selecting the operation
mode.
0109 Operation • A shift was made from one automatic • Return to the original automatic
mode operation mode to another automatic operation mode, and then restart.
changed operation mode.
0110 In buffer • Start is impossible because buffer is • Bring the buffer correction to an end.
correction being corrected. Or cancel it and then restart.
I - 17
2. Stop Codes
Error
No.
0114 Fixed cycle • The fixed cycle subprogram is not • Register the fixed cycle subprogram
registered correctly registered. again.
illegal • Refer to "Appendix 1. Fixed Cycle
Program" for the procedures.
0115 CNC • NC operation cannot be started • The temperature of the NC or
overheat because of a thermal warning (Z53 operation board has risen above the
CNC overheat). specified temperature. Take cooling
measures. Turn OFF the NC power,
or lower the temperature with a
cooler, etc.
0116 Stat sgnl ON • An automatic start signal was input for • Check the program.
in sub-sys a system in the sub-system operation • Check the user PLC.
mode mode before the subsystem was
started.
0117 Restart point • When using the program restart • Return all axes to the restart position
ret. Not comp. function, all axes have not returned before starting automatic operation.
to the restart position.
0118 Program • When using the program restart • Turn the program restart mode
restart mode function, the program restart mode signal OFF, or turn the axis position
signal was turned ON or the axis return mode signal OFF before
position return mode signal was starting automatic operation.
turned ON after the restart block was
stopped.
0119 Reset signal • When using the program restart • Input the NC reset signal before
not input function, the NC reset signal was not starting automatic operation.
input after turning the program
restart mode signal OFF.
0138 In absolute • A start signal was input during an • Start after the absolute position
position alarm absolute position detection alarm. detection alarm is released.
0139 In abs posn • Start signal is input during zero point • Start after the zero point initialization
initial setting initialization of absolute position is complete.
detection system.
0151 In prog check • Automatic start is disabled because • Put the program check function in
backward the program check function is in forward state and execute automatic
mode backward state. start.
0160 Memory • The super option is invalid. The • Delete or format the machining
capacity over program memory capacity of the program.
machining program has been • Add the super option purchase point.
exceeded.
I - 18
2. Stop Codes
T02 Message The feed hold status has been established due to some condition or
other during automatic operation.
Error
No.
0201 H/W stroke • An axis has reached the stored • Using manual operations, move the
end axis stroke limit. axis from the stroke end limit switch.
exists • The machining program must be
corrected.
0202 S/W stroke • An axis has reached the stored • Using manual operations, move the
end axis stroke limit. axis from the stroke end limit switch.
exists • The machining program must be
corrected.
0203 Reset signal • The reset signal has been input. • The position at which the program is
ON executed has returned to the head
and so automatic operation is
performed from the start point of the
machining program.
0204 Auto • The "FEED HOLD" switch on the • Automatic operation can be resumed
operation machine operation board is ON by operating the CYCLE START
pause signal (valid). switch.
ON
0205 Operation • The mode changed from the • Return to the original automatic
mode automatic operation mode to another operation mode, and then restart.
changed automatic operation mode.
0206 In • A command where two objects (tool • Release the alarm with reset.
interference turrets, etc.) will interfere has been • To move the interfering object in the
mode issued. interfering direction, invalidate the
• Two objects (tool turrets, etc.) have interference check first.
entered the buffer area. • Refer to the instruction manual issued
by the machine manufacturer for how
to invalidate the interference check.
0215 Abs posn • Absolute position detection alarm • Release the absolute position
detect alarm occurred. detection alarm.
occurred
I - 19
2. Stop Codes
T03 Message Operation stops after a single block in the program has executed
during automatic operation.
Error
No.
0301 Single block • Block stop occurred because the • Automatic operation can be resumed
stop signal "SINGLE BLOCK STOP" switch on by setting the CYCLE START switch
ON the machine operation panel was to ON.
ON.
0302 Block stop • The block stop command was • Automatic operation can be resumed
cmnd in user specified in user macro program. by setting the CYCLE START switch
macro to ON.
0303 Operation • The mode changed from the • First return to the original automatic
mode automatic operation mode to another mode and automatic operation can
changed automatic operation mode. be resumed by setting the CYCLE
START switch to ON.
0304 MDI interrupt • The last block of MDI completed. • MDI operation can be resumed by
completed • The last block of PLC interrupt setting MDI again and setting the
completed. CYCLE START switch to ON.
• Turn the CYCLE START switch to
ON to restart automatic operation.
0305 Teaching • The block of the position control • Turn the CYCLE START switch to
block command (G132) or position control ON to restart automatic operation.
completed variable skip command (G133)
completed during teaching mode.
T04 Message Collation and stop occurred during automatic operation.
Error
No.
0401 Collation and • Collation and stop occurred. • Automatic operation can be resumed
stop by automatically starting.
I - 20
3. Servo/Spindle Alarms
This section describes alarms occurred by the errors in the servo system such as the drive unit‚ motor and
encoder, etc. The alarm message‚ alarm No. and axis name will display on the alarm message screen. The
axis where the alarm occurred and the alarm No. will also display on the servo monitor screen and the spindle
monitor screen respectively. If several alarms have occurred‚ up to two errors per axis will display on the servo
monitor screen and the spindle monitor screen respectively.
(Note 1) The alarm class and alarm reset class combinations are preset.
Alarm class Alarm reset class Resetting methods
S01 PR After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the
alarm by turning the NC power ON again.
S02 - Again after removing the cause of the alarm, reset
the alarm by turning OFF the controller power and
then turning it ON.
S03 NR After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the
alarm by inputting the NC RESET key.
S04 AR After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the
alarm by turning the drive unit power ON again.
S51 - This is cleared if a correct value is set.
S52 - -
(Note 2) The resetting method may change according to the alarm class.
For example, even if "S03 SERVO ALARM: NR" is displayed, it may be necessary to turn the NC
power ON again.
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

S Message ∆∆∆∆
Servo : Axis name
Axis name
Spindle : Spindle name
Alarm No. (Parameter No.)
Message
Alarm class
(1) Class: S01/S03/S04 Servo alarm

Alarm No. Message Meaning
0010 Insufficient voltage Insufficient PN bus voltage was detected in main circuit.
0011 Axis selection error Setting of the axis No. selection switch is incorrect.
0012 Memory error 1 A CPU error or an internal memory error was detected during the
power ON self-check.
0013 Software processing Software processing has not finished within the specified time.
error 1
0014 Software processing Software processing has not finished within the specified time.
error 2
0015 Memory error 2 A CPU error or an internal memory error was detected during the
power ON self-check.
0016 Magnet pole pos An error was detected in the magnetic pole detection for controlling
detect error the motor.
0017 A/D converter error An error was detected in the A/D converter for detecting current FB.
0018 Motor side dtc: Init Initial communication with the motor end detector failed.
commu err
I - 21

0019 Detector commu err Initial communication with the motor end detector on master axis
in syn cont failed when setting closed-loop current synchronous control. Or the
communication was interrupted.
001A Machine side dtc: Initial communication with the linear scale or the ball screw end
Init comu er detector failed.
001B Machine side dtc: The machine side detector detected an error.
Error 1 As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table
001C Machine side dtc: (1).
Error 2
001D Machine side dtc:
Error 3
001E Machine side dtc:
Error 4
001F Machine side dtc: An error was detected in communication data with the linear scale or
Commu error the ball screw end detector. Or the communication was interrupted.
0020 Motor side dtc: No When an excessive error alarm occurred, no signal from the motor
signal side detector was detected.
0021 Machine side dtc: When an excessive error alarm occurred, no signal from the machine
No signal side detector was detected.
0023 Excessive speed A difference between the speed command and speed feedback was
error continuously exceeding 50 r/min for longer than the setting time.
0024 Grounding The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).
0025 Absolute position The absolute position was lost, as the backup battery voltage dropped
data lost in the absolute position detector.
0026 Unused axis error A power module error occurred in the axis whose axis No. selection
switch was set to "F" (free axis).
0027 Machine side dtc: The machine side detector detected an error.
Error 5 As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table
(1).
0028 Machine side dtc:
Error 6
0029 Machine side dtc:
Error 7
002A Machine side dtc:
Error 8
002B Motor side dtc: The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor)
Error 1 detected an error.
002C Motor side dtc: As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table
Error 2 (1).
002D Motor side dtc:
Error 3
002E Motor side dtc:
Error 4
002F Motor side dtc: An error was detected in communication data with the motor end
Commu error detector or with the linear scale of a linear servo system. Or the
communication was interrupted.
0030 Over regeneration Over-regeneration detection level became over 100%. The
regenerative resistor is overloaded.
I - 22

0031 Overspeed The motor was detected to rotate at a speed exceeding the allowable
speed. (In the case of linear motor, it was detected to move at a speed
exceeding the allowable speed.)
0032 Power module Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its
overcurrent operation.
0033 Overvoltage PN bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value.
0034 NC-DRV commu: An error was detected in the data received from the CNC.
CRC error
0035 NC command error The travel command data that was received from the CNC was
excessive.
0036 NC-DRV commu: The communication with the CNC was interrupted.
Commu error
0037 Initial parameter An incorrect parameter was detected among the parameters received
error from the CNC at the power ON.
0038 NC-DRV commu: An error was detected in the communication frames received from the
Protocol error 1 CNC.
0039 NC-DRV commu: An error was detected in the axis information data received from the
Protocol error 2 CNC.
003A Overcurrent Excessive current was detected in the motor drive current.
003B Power module Thermal protection function in the power module has started its
overheat operation.
003C Regeneration circuit An error was detected in the regenerative transistor or in the
error regenerative resistor.
003D Spindle speed The spindle motor failed to rotate faster than 45 r/min, even when the
blocked max. torque command was given.
003E Spindle speed 1. The spindle motor speed feedback was detected to be accelerated
overrun exceeding the commanded speed.
2. The spindle motor was detected to be rotated at a speed exceeding
the parameter value, while the speed command was “0” (including
the case of operation stoppage during the position control).
0040 Detector select unit An error was detected in the motor switching signals that were
swtch err received from the detector selection unit, while controlling one drive
unit and two motors.
0041 Detector select unit An error was detected in the communication with the detector
commu err selection unit, while controlling one drive unit and two motors.
0042 Feedback error 1 An error was detected in the feedback signals of the position detector
in a servo system, or in PLG's feedback signals in a spindle system.
0043 Feedback error 2 Excessive difference was detected in position data between the motor
end detector and the machine end detector in a servo system. In a
spindle system, an error was detected in the encoder feedback
signals.
0044 Inappropriate coil When using a coil changeover motor, C-axis was controlled while the
for C axis high-speed coil was selected.
0045 Fan stop A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped, and the loads on the unit
exceeded the specified value.
0046 Motor overheat Thermal protection function of the motor or in the detector, has started
its operation.
0047 Regenerative Thermal protection function of the regenerative resistor, has started its
resistor overheat operation.
I - 23

0048 Motor side dtc: The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor)
Error 5 detected an error.
0049 Motor side dtc: As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table
Error 6 (1).
004A Motor side dtc:
Error 7
004B Motor side dtc:
Error 8
004C Current err at mag A current error was detected in the IPM spindle motor when the initial
pole detect magnetic pole was being formed.
004E NC command mode The mode outside the specification was input in spindle control mode
error selection.
004F Instantaneous The power was momentarily interrupted.
power interrupt
0050 Overload 1 Overload detection level became over 100%. The motor or the drive
unit is overloaded.
0051 Overload 2 Current command of more than 95% of the unit's max. current was
being continuously given for longer than 1 second in a servo system.
In a spindle system, current command of more than 95% of the motor's
max. current was being continuously given for longer than 1 second.
0052 Excessive error 1 A difference between the actual and theoretical motor positions during
servo ON exceeded the setting value.
0053 Excessive error 2 A difference between the actual and theoretical motor positions during
servo OFF exceeded the setting value.
0054 Excessive error 3 When an excessive error 1 occurred, detection of the motor current
failed.
0055 External emergency There is no contactor shutoff command, even after 30 seconds has
stop error passed since the external emergency stop was input.
0058 Collision detection When collision detection function was valid, the disturbance torque in
1: G0 rapid traverse (G0) exceeded the collision detection level.
0059 Collision detection When collision detection function was valid, the disturbance torque in
1: G1 cutting feed (G1) exceeded the collision detection level.
005A Collision detection 2 When collision detection function was valid, the command torque
reached the max. motor torque.
005B Sfty obsrvation: In safety monitoring mode, the command speed was detected to
Cmd spd err exceed the safe speed.
005C Orientation After orientation was achieved, a difference between the command
feedback error and feedback exceeded the parameter setting.
005D Sfty obsrvation: In safety monitoring mode, the door state signal from the NC and the
Door stat err same signal from the drive unit don't match. Otherwise, door open
state was detected in normal mode.
005E Sfty obsrvation: FB In safety monitoring mode, the motor speed was detected to exceed
speed err the safe speed.
005F External contactor A contact of the external contactor is welding. Or the contactor fails to
error be ON during ready ON.
0060 Pw sply:Inst pw It was detected that the 24VDC power supply lowered.
interpt(DC24V)
0061 Pw sply: Pwr Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its
module overcurnt operation.
I - 24

0062 Pw sply: Frequency The input power supply frequency increased above the specification
error range.
0063 Pw sply: The supplementary regenerative transistor is being ON.
Supplement regen
err
0065 Pw sply: Rush relay A resistor relay for rush short circuit fails to be ON.
error
0067 Pw sply: Phase An open-phase condition was detected in input power supply circuit.
interruption
0068 Pw sply: Watchdog The system does not operate correctly.
0069 Pw sply: Grounding The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).
006A Pw sply: Ext A contact of the external contactor is welding.
contactor weld
006B Pw sply: Rush relay A resistor relay for rush short circuit fails to be OFF.
welding
006C Pw sply: Main An error was detected in charging operation of the main circuit
circuit error capacitor.
006D Pw sply: Parameter The capacity of the power supply unit and the regenerative resistor
error type that was set in the parameter are mismatched.
006E Pw sply: Memory An error was detected in the internal memory or A/D converter.
error/AD error
006F Power supply error No power supply is connected to the drive unit, or a communication
error was detected.
0070 Pw sply: Ext A mismatch of the external emergency stop input and CNC emergency
emergency stp err stop input continued for 30 seconds.
0071 Pw sply: Instant pwr The power was momentarily interrupted.
interrupt
0072 Pw sply: Fan stop A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped, and overheat
occurred in the power module.
0073 Pw sply: Over Over-regeneration detection level became over 100%. The
regeneration regenerative resistor is overloaded. This alarm cannot be reset for 15
min from the occurrence. Leave the drive system emergized for more
than 15 min, then turn the power ON to reset the alarm.
0074 Pw sply: Regen Thermal protection function of the regenerative resistor, has started its
resist ovheat operation.
0075 Pw sply: L+ and L- bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value. As
Overvoltage the voltage between L+ and L- is high immedialtey after this alarm,
another alarm may occur if this alarm is reset in a short time. Wait
more than 5 min before resetting so that the voltage drops.
0076 Pw sply: Ext EMG As for the external emergency stop settings, the setting on the rotary
stop set err switch and the parameter setting are mismatched.
0077 Pw sply: Power Thermal protection function in the power module has started its
module overheat operation.
007F Drv unit pw supply A mismatch of program mode selection was detected. Turn the drive
restart req unit power ON again.
0087 Drive unit Answers from a drive unit connected to the power supply stopped.
communication
error
0088 Watchdog The system does not operate correctly.
I - 25
Separate table (1)

Alarm number when motor
002B 002C 002D 002E
end is connected
Alarm number when machine
001B 001C 001D 001E
end is connected
OSA105 -
LED error
Detector type OSA166 CPU error Data error -
MDS-B-HR - -
A CPU initial error Deterioration of the An error was
Meaning of data -
was detected. LED was detected. detected in the data.

0048 0049 004A 004B
end is connected
0027 0028 0029 002A
end is connected
OSA105 - - - -
OSA166 - - - -
Detector type
MDS-B-HR Communication
Connection error Judgment error Magnetic error
error
An error was An error was The linear scale An error was detected
detected in the detected in the analog frequency in the magnetic data
Meaning of data connection with the communication with cycle could not be for the linear servo
analog output linear the serial output judged. system.
scale. linear scale.

002B 002C 002D 002E
end is connected
001B 001C 001D 001E
end is connected
TS5690 - -
Detector type Initialization error Waveform error
TS5691 - -
An initialization error An error was
was detected when detected in the A, B,
Meaning of data - -
the power was Z analog signal
turned ON. waveform.

0048 0049 004A 004B
end is connected
0027 0028 0029 002A
end is connected
TS5690 - - Relative position data
Detector type Overspeed
TS5691 - - error
The tolerable An error was detected
Meaning of data - rotation speed was - in the relative position
exceeded. data.
I - 26

002B 002C 002D 002E
end is connected
001B 001C 001D 001E
end is connected
Manufacturer
Detector type
name
AT342 Photo-electric type,
AT343 Mitsutoyo static capacity data
mismatch
AT543
LC191M ROM/RAM error
Initialization error EEPROM error Relative/absolute
LC491M
position data
RCN723 Heidenhain mismatch
RCN223
ERM280 - -
MJ831 Sony - - - -
Faulty mounting Detection position
ADB-20J60 MHI - Scale disconnected
accuracy deviated
Futaba
FMD Denshi - - - -
Kogyo

0048 0049 004A 004B
end is connected
0027 0028 0029 002A
end is connected
Manufacturer
Detector type
name
AT342
Photo-electric type Static capacity type Photo-electric type
AT343 Mitsutoyo
overspeed error error
AT543
LC191M
CPU error
LC491M Absolute position
data error Absolute position
RCN723 Heidenhain Overspeed
data error
RCN223
ERM280 -
MJ831 Sony - - - Encoder error
ADB-20J60 MHI - - Gain fault Phase fault
Futaba
FMD Denshi - - Waveform error Excessive speed
Kogyo
I - 27
(2) Class: S02 Message: Initial parameter error

An error was found in the parameters transmitted from the controller to the drive unit when the power was
turned ON.
Remove the cause of the alarm, and then reset the alarm by turning the controller power OFF once.
(a) Servo
Alarm
Details Remedy
No.
1 The servo parameter setting data is illegal. Check the descriptions for the appropriate servo
to The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameter parameters and correct them.
256 where the error occurred.
-1 The number of constants to be used in the Check that all the related parameters are
following functions is too large: specified correctly.
• Electronic gears sv001:PC1, sv002:PC2, sv003:PGN1
• Position loop gain sv018:PIT, sv019:RNG1, sv020:RNG2
• Speed feedback conversion
-2 When high-speed serial incremental detector Check that all the related parameters are
(OSE104, OSE105) is connected, parameters for specified correctly.
absolute position are set to ON. sv017:SPEC, sv025:MTYP
Set the parameters for absolute position
detection to OFF.
To detect an absolute position, replace the
incremental specification detector with an
absolute position detector.
-3 No servo option is found. Check that all the related parameters are
The closed loop (including the ball screw- specified correctly.
end detector) or dual feedback control is an sv025:MTYP/pen
optional function. sv017:SPEC/dfbx
The SHG control is an optional function. specified correctly.
sv057:SHGC
sv058:SHGCsp
The adaptive filtering is an optional function. specified correctly.
sv027:SSF1/aflt
(b) Spindle
Alarm
Details Remedy
No.
1 Spindle parameter error Check the descriptions for the appropriate
to The spindle parameter setting data is illegal. spindle parameters and correct them.
256 The alarm No. is the No. of the spindle Refer to Alarm No.37 in Spindle Drive
parameter where the error occurred. Maintenance Manual.
I - 28
(3) Class: S51 Message: Parameter error

This warning is displayed if a parameter outside the tolerance range is set.
Illegal settings will be ignored.
This alarm will be reset when a correct value is set.
(a) Servo
Alarm
Details Remedy
No.
1 Servo parameter setting data is illegal. Check the descriptions for the appropriate servo
to The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameter parameters and correct them.
256 where the warning occurred.
(b) Spindle
1 Spindle parameter setting data is illegal. Check the descriptions for the appropriate
to The alarm No. is the No. of the spindle spindle parameters and correct them.
256 parameter where the warning occurred. Refer to Spindle Drive Maintenance Manual.
I - 29
(4) Class: S52 Servo warning

Displays servo and spindle tool warnings.

0093 Init abs pos fluctuation The position data have fluctuated during the absolute position
initializing.
0096 Scale feedback error An excessive deviation was detected between the motor end
detector and MP scale feedback data in a MP scale absolute
position detection system.
0097 Scale offset error An error was detected in the offset data received from the MP scale
in a MP scale absolute position detection system.
009B Detector converting An error was detected in the shift distance of the magnetic pole in a
unit: Magnetic pole shift linear servo system.
warning
009E Absolute position An error was detected in the revolution counter of the absolute
detector: Revolution position detector. The absolute position data cannot be
counter error compensated.
009F Battery voltage drop The battery voltage that is supplied to the absolute position detector
dropped. The absolute position data is retained.
00A6 Fan stop warning A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped.
00A8 Turret indexing warning The designated position shift amount of turret indexing is outside the
setting range.
00A9 Orientation feedback As an orientation feedback error occurred, the retrial has been
warning conducted.
00E0 Overregeneration Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.
warning
00E1 Overload warning Overload detection level exceeded 80%.
00E2 Continuous high-speed The motor was continuously rotated at a speed exceeding the rated
revolution warning speed.
00E3 Absolute position Deviation between the absolute and relative position data was
counter warning detected.
00E4 Set parameter warning An incorrect parameter was detected among the parameters
received from the CNC.
00E6 Control axis Control axis detachment was commanded.
detachment warning
00E7 In NC emergency stop Emergency stop was input from the CNC.
state
00E8 Power supply: Over Regeneration that are beyond the power supply limitation has
supplementary frequently occurred.
regeneration frequency
00E9 Instantaneous power The power was momentarily interrupted.
interruption warning
00EA In external emergency External emergency stop signal was input.
stop state
00EB Power supply: Over Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.
regeneration warning
00EE Pw sply: Fan stop A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped.
warning
I - 30
4. MCP Alarms
4.1 MCP Alarms
4. MCP Alarms
These alarms denote that trouble has arisen in the drive units or other interfacing areas.
4.1 MCP Alarms
Y02 Message There is something wrong with the data transmission

Status 1 Status 2 between the MCP and drive unit after the NC power
has been turned ON.
Sta-
Message Status 2 Details Remedy
tus 1
0050 Sys alarm: 0001 Background processing time A software or hardware failure is
Process time over exceeded assumed.
0002 MCP processing time Contact the service center.
exceeded
0051 SV commu er: 1ch 0x03 Data ID error Check for the abnormalities in
Data ID error (four consecutive errors) the following items.
2ch 1x03 x : No. of axis with which • Cable
communication error (Is the cable disconnected?)
3ch 2x03 occurred • Cable shield grounding
(0~: mcp axis No. 1 ~) • Connector insertion
SV commu er: 1ch 0x04 Received-frame No. error • Drive unit mounting state
Receiv frame No. (four consecutive errors)
2ch 1x04 Take a note of the 7-segment
x : No. of axis with which
LED contents of each drive unit
communication error
3ch 2x04 and report to the Service Center.
occurred
(0~: mcp axis No. 1 ~)
SV commu er: 0005 Communication error
Commu error (No error classification)
SV commu er: 0006 Connect error
Connect error
SV commu er: 1ch 0x10 Packet escape error
Packet esc error Packet was skipped twice in
2ch 1x10 succession during
communication cycle
3ch 2x10
x: Axis No.
SV commu er: Init 0020 Initial communication error
commu error The drive unit could not shift
to the initial communication
run time and stopped.
SV commu er: 1ch 0x30 Node detect error
Node detect error No response from drive unit
2ch 1x30 to the request from NC when
setting network
3ch 2x30 configuration.
xx: Channel No.
I - 31
4. MCP Alarms
4.1 MCP Alarms
Y03 AMP unequipped Drive unit mounting

Axis name or spindle name state
Details Remedy
The drive unit was not mounted. Check the mounting state of the drive units.
• Cable connection destination
(Is the cable connected correctly?)
• Cable
(Is the cable disconnected?)
• Connector insertion
Check whether the drive unit input power is ON.
Check whether the drive unit axis No. switch is
correctly set.
Y06 Illegal mcp_no. The MCP and Axis parameters are different when
the power is turned ON.
Details Remedy
• Base axis parameter : "mcp_no" Check the parameter setting values.
• Spindle NC parameter : "smcp_no"
• Auxiliary axis parameter : "mcp_no"
The following types of problems may be found in the
above parameters.
(1) Setting values are duplicated.
(2) The specified axis numbers are not continuous.
(3) Too many axes are specified.
(4) Too many cards are specified.
I - 32
4. MCP Alarms
4.1 MCP Alarms
Y12 Message There is something wrong with the data transmission

Status 1 Status 2 between the MCP and drive unit after the NC power
has been turned ON.
Sta-
Message Status 2 Details Remedy
tus 1
0051 SV commu er: 1ch 0x00 CRC error Check for the abnormalities in
CRC error 1 (10 times/910.2ms) the following items.
2ch 1x00 x : No. of axis with which • Cable
communication error (Is the cable disconnected?)
occurred • Cable shield grounding
3ch 2x00
(0~: mcp axis No. 1 ~) • Connector insertion
SV commu er: 1ch 0x01 CRC error • Drive unit mounting state
CRC error 2 (four consecutive errors)
2ch 1x01 Take a note of the 7-segment
x : No. of axis with which
3ch 2x01 communication error LED contents of each drive unit
occurred and report to the Service Center.
SV commu er: 1ch 0x02 Receive timing error
Receiv timing err (four consecutive errors)
2ch 1x02 x : No. of axis with which
communication error
3ch 2x02 occurred
SV commu er: 1ch 0x01 Data ID error
Data ID error (four consecutive errors)
communication error
3ch 2x01 occurred
SV commu er: 1ch 0x01 Received-frame No. error
Receiv frame No. (four consecutive errors)
communication error
occurred
3ch 2x01
I - 33
4. MCP Alarms
4.1 MCP Alarms
Y13 AMP unequipped Drive unit mounting

Axis name or spindle name Cause of drive unit non-mounted state
state (Refer to following)
Details Remedy
The drive unit was not mounted. Check the mounting state of the drive units.
Cause of drive unit non-mounted state is following • Cable connection destination
below. (Is the cable connected correctly?)
Display • Cable
Details
1 ch cause (Is the cable disconnected?)
2 ch 1 Receive not completed
• Connector insertion
3 ch 2 Received-frame No. error
4 Received-frame CRC error
Check whether the drive unit input power is ON.
8 Data ID error Check whether the drive unit axis No. switch is
correctly set.
Bit0 1ch Receive not completed

Bit1 Received-frame No. error
Bit2 Received-frame CRC error
Bit3 Data ID error
Bit6 Received-frame CRC error
Bit7 Data ID error
BitA Received-frame CRC error
BitB Data ID error
BitC
BitD
BitE
BitF
I - 34
4. MCP Alarms
4.2 MCP Warnings
4.2 MCP Warnings
y51 Parameter error The MCP and Axis parameters are different when the power
is turned ON.
Error
No.
1 Parameter G0tL • The linear acceleration/ • Check the axis specification
illegal deceleration rapid traverse time parameter "G0tL, G0t1".
constant has not been set. Or the
set value is outside the setting
range. Or "(G0tL-G0t1) < 1".
2 Parameter G1tL • The linear acceleration/ • Check the axis specification
illegal deceleration cutting feed time parameter "G1tL, G1t1".
range. Or "(G1tL-G1t1) < 1".
3 Parameter G0t0 • The primary delay acceleration/ • Check the axis specification
illegal deceleration rapid traverse time parameter "G0t1".
range.
4 Parameter G1t0 • The primary delay acceleration/ • Check the axis specification
illegal deceleration cutting feed time parameter "G1t1".
range.
9 Parameter Grid • The grid interval is not set, or is • Check the zero (reference) point
space error outside setting range. return parameter "grspc".
11 Parameter pG0t • The superimposition time constant • Check the axis specification
illegal for acceleration/deceleration rapid parameter "pG0t, pG0t_S".
traverse has not been set. Or the
range. Or "(pG0t-pG0t_S) < 1".
12 Parameter pG1t • The superimposition time constant • Check the axis specification
illegal for acceleration/deceleration parameter "pG1t, pG1t_S".
cutting feed has not been set. Or
the set value is outside the setting
range. Or "(pG1t-pG1t_S) < 1".
13 Parameter PG0t3 • The 3-axis superimposition time • Check the axis specification
illegal constant for acceleration/ parameter "pG0t3, pG0t3_S".
deceleration rapid traverse has not
been set. Or the set value is outside
the setting range.
Or "(pG0t3-pG0t3_S) < 1".
14 Parameter PG1t3 • The 3-axis superimposition time • Check the axis specification
illegal constant for acceleration/ parameter "pG1t3, pG1t3_S".
deceleration cutting feed has not
the setting range.
Or "(pG1t3-pG13t_S) < 1".
I - 35
4. MCP Alarms
4.2 MCP Warnings
Error
No.
15 Parameter PG0t_S • The superimposition adjustment • Check the axis specification
illegal time constant for acceleration/ parameter "pG0t_S".
deceleration rapid traverse has not
the setting range.
16 Parameter PG1t_S • The superimposition adjustment • Check the axis specification
illegal time constant for acceleration/ parameter "pG1t_S".
deceleration cutting feed has not
the setting range.
17 Parameter PG0t3_S • The 3-axis superimposition • Check the axis specification
illegal adjustment time constant for parameter "pG0t3_S".
acceleration/deceleration rapid
range.
18 Parameter PG1t3_S • The 3-axis superimposition • Check the axis specification
illegal adjustment time constant for parameter "pG1t3_S".
acceleration/deceleration rapid
range.
101 Values of PC1/PC2 • The values set to PC1 and PC2 • Reduce the "PC1" and "PC2"
too large while rotation axes are used is too values on the servo parameter.
large.
103 SV parameter SPEC • An invalid value is specified for • Set bit 7 of servo parameter
is illegal servo parameter "SPEC". "SPEC" to "1".
I - 36
4. MCP Alarms
4.3 Safety Observation Alarms
Y20 Message When this alarm is output, emergency stop mode is applied.
Status1 Status2 Refer to "remedy" of each alarm as to how to cancel the alarm.
Status1 Message Status2 Details Remedy
0001 Parameter Axis Speed monitoring parameter in NC or servo drive unit may be at
compare error name NC and the parameter fault.
transmitted to the drive unit are Contact the service center.
not matched.
Name of the axis in which error
occurred is displayed.
0002 Sfty Axis A speed exceeding the speed set Review the speed monitoring
obsrvation: name with parameter is commanded parameter and user PLC.
Cmd spd err during the speed monitoring Reboot the NC.
mode.
0003 Sfty Axis The commanded position NC or servo drive unit may be at
obsrvation: FB name transmitted to the servo drive unit fault.
pos err from NC and the feedback Contact the service center.
position to be received from the
servo drive unit are deviated
greatly during the speed
monitoring mode.
0004 Sfty Axis Actual rotation speed of the motor Review the speed monitoring
obsrvation: FB name is exceeding the speed set with parameter and user PLC.
speed err speed monitoring parameter Reboot the NC.
during the speed monitoring
mode.
0005 Door signal: Door No. Door state signal for NC side Check the cable.
Input input and door state signal for Check the door switch.
mismatch drive unit side input are not Reboot the NC.
matched. One of the following
causes can be thought.
・Cable is disconnected
・Door switch is at fault
・NC or servo drive unit is at fault
0006 No spd obsv Door No. Door open state was detected Review the user PLC.
mode in door outside the speed monitoring Reboot the NC.
open mode.
Incorrect user PLC or the same
cause as in the case of 0005
(Door signal: Input mismatch) can
be thought.
0007 Speed Axis Two speed monitoring Change the relevant parameters
obsv:Para name parameters are not matched at so that the two speed monitoring
incompatible the rising edge of the speed parameters match.
monitoring mode signal. Reboot the NC.
I - 37
4. MCP Alarms

0008 Contactor Contact- Contactor welding was detected. Check if the contactor's auxiliary b
welding or No. contact is output to the device set
detected with #1380 MC_dp1 and #1381
MC_dp2 correctly.
If welded, the contactor must be
replaced.
Reboot the NC.
0009 No spec: - The servo parameter and spindle Turn the servo parameter
Safety parameter are set for speed SV113/bitF, the spindle parameter
observation monitoring when there is no SP229/bitF and spindle-type servo
safety observation options in parameter OFF. Then, reboot the
system. NC.
4.4 Safety Observation Warnings
y21 Message
Remove the cause of warning to cancel the warning.
Status1 Status2
0001 Speed obsv Axis Speed monitoring mode is turned When decelerated, the warning is
signal:Speed name ON when the speed is exceeding canceled and speed monitoring is
over the safety speed. restarted.
I - 38
5. Messages Related to System
5.1 System Alarms
5.1 System Alarms
Z Message A system alarm is displayed.
No. Message Details Remedy

Z01 Watchdog alarm • The software process was not • Contact the Mitsubishi Service
completed normally. Center.
Z08 File area illegal • This occurs when the parameters • Do not carry out editing operations
related to formatting differ during or input/output operations while
formatting. This also occurs in the this error is occurring.
unformatted state. • After formatting the file system,
turn the power ON again.
• Change the parameter causing the
error (refer to the error No.) to the
same state as during formatting,
and then turn the power ON again.
Z09 Remote I/O failure • This occurs when a fault occurs in • Replace the cable.
a system using a remote I/O unit. • Replace the remote I/O unit.
• The cable is disconnected • Turn the remote I/O unit power
• Data transmission error ON.
• Data input error
• Remote I/O fault
• Remote I/O unit power OFF
Z56 Fix_P re-entry • This occurs when the fixed cycle's • Register the fixed cycle's
subprogram is not registered subprogram again.
correctly.
Z57 No spindle signal • A no-signal state was detected in • Replace the encoder or encoder
the input signal for the 1st or 2nd cable.
spindle's encoder.
00 No-signal phase judgment code
(HEX display)
A phase no-signal
B phase no-signal
Z phase no-signal
Judgment No. of spindle causing no-signal

No. Spindle causing no-signal
1 1st spindle
2 2nd spindle
Z60 AMP power off • The drive unit power was turned • Turn the NC power OFF, and then
OFF while Y48A was input. turn the drive unit and NC power
ON again.
• Turn Y48A OFF. (The message
will change to a system error.)
I - 39
5.1 System Alarms

Z61 Battery empty • The battery no longer has the • Keep the power ON. (If the power
capacity to hold the data. is turned OFF, data such as the
parameters and machining
programs could be lost.)
• Request a battery replacement.
(Contact the Mitsubishi Service
Center immediately.)
Z62 Battery detect circuit • An error occurred in the battery • Contact the Mitsubishi Service
error detection circuit. The battery may Center.
no longer have the capacity to hold
the data.
Z63 CNC overheat • The temperature of the NC control • Stop operation. (The operation is
unit has risen above the specified not carried out correctly.)
value. • Take cooling measures. Contact
the machine tool builder.
Z70 (Abs data error) (1) Refer to Abs data error (Z70).
Z71 (Abs encoder failure) (2) Refer to Abs encoder failure (Z71).
(1) Abs data error (Z70)
Z70 Message If absolute position data is lost in the absolute

Error No. Axis name position detection system, an error is displayed.
Error Zero-point Release alarm Servo alarm
No.
Message Details initialization at power-off number
0001 Abs posn ref ptZero point has not been initialized.
Required — —
set incomplete → Initialize the zero point.
0002 Absolute Absolute position origin point data
position lost stored in NC is lost. Required — —
→ Initialize the zero point.
0003 Abs posn param The parameters used to detect the
changed absolute position is changed.
→ Set the parameter correctly, and Required — —
turn ON the power again, then
execute zero-point initialization.
0004 Abs posn The difference of the machine position
tolerance amnt at power OFF and the machine position
over at power ON exceeded the value set in
Abs posn set screen “1203 Move amnt Required — —
in pwr OFF”.
→ Initialize the zero point.
I - 40
5.1 System Alarms
(2) Abs encoder failure (Z71)
Z71 Message If a detector error is detected in the absolute

Error No. Axis name position detection system, an error is displayed.
Message Remedy
No. initialization at power-off number
0001 AbsEncoder: The backup voltage in the absolute
Backup voltag position detector dropped.
drop → Charge or replace the battery,
check the cable for connection, or Required — 25
check the detector. Initialize the
zero point after power is turned ON
again.
0003 AbsEncoder: Communication with the absolute
Communica- position detector failed. (Required)
tion err → Check the cable, card, or detector, Only after Release 91
and replace it as needed. Initialize detector
the zero point after power is turned replacement
ON again.
0004 AbsEncoder: Absolute position data for absolute
Abs data position configuration was changed. (Required)
changed → Check the cable, card, or detector, Only after Release 93
ON again.
0005 AbsEncoder: Serial data from the absolute position
Serial data detector contains an error. (Required)
error → Check the cable, card, or detector, Only after Release 92
ON again.
0006 AbsEncoder: The absolute position does not match
Abs/inc posn the incremental position.
diffr → Check the cable, card, or detector, (Required) — E3
and replace it as needed. Initialize
the zero point after power is turned
ON again.
0007 AbsEncoder: Initial communication with the
Initial commu absolute position detector is disabled. (Required)
err → Check the cable, card, or detector, Only after Release 90
ON again.
I - 41
5.1 System Alarms
(3) Initial parameter error (Z25)
Z25 Initial parameter error

Status
Status Message Details Remedy
0002 Imaginary coord. • The hypothetical coordinate • Review the setting of the
Param illegal control parameter setting is illegal. hypothetical coordinate target axis
(#1152 imag_ax[1], #1153
imag_ax[2]) in the basic system
parameters.
0003 Interfere check 2: • The interference check 2 • Review the setting for the plane
Param ilgl parameter setting is illegal. rotation angle (#1152 to #1154) in
the basic specification 1
parameters.
I - 42
5.2 System Warnings
5.2 System Warnings
z Message

z30 (Machine maker • Refer to "(1) HSPRGM conversion error (z30)".
macro conversion
error)
z52 Battery fault • The battery for saving the data is • Protect the machine data. (Backup
spent. the parameters and machining
programs, etc.)
• Request a battery replacement.
(Contact the Mitsubishi Service
Center.)
z53 CNC overheat • The temperature of the NC control • Take cooling measures.
warning unit has risen above the specified
value.
z58 Fan slowing down • Cooling fan's ability has • Request a cooling fan
deteriorated. replacement. (Contact the
Mitsubishi Service Center.)
z73 (Absolute position • Refer to "(2) Absolute position data warning (z73)".
data warning)
z80 Option points empty • The no remaining amount warning • Turn the super options OFF.
is output when the remaining Add the super option purchasing
number of points is 0 points. points.
z81 Points<1000P • The remaining amount low warning • Add the super option purchasing
2 is output when the remaining points. The warning will be reset
number of points is lower than 1000 when the remaining number of
points. points is larger than the remaining
number of points 2 (1000P) for the
warning display.
z82 Points<24h • A warning is output when the • Add the super option purchasing
remaining number of points is points. The warning will be reset
smaller than the points equivalent when the remaining number of
to 24h. points is larger than the remaining
number of points 1 (24h) for the
warning display.
• Reduce the number of selected
super options. The warning will be
reset when the remaining number
of points 1 (24h) for the warning
display is less than the remaining
number of points.
z90 Diagnosis • Retrieval of the diagnosis • Save the diagnosis information.
information acquired information with MELDAS-NET
stopped.
I - 43
5.2 System Warnings
(1) HSPRGM conversion error (z30)
z30 HSPRGM conversion error

Status
Status Message Details Remedy
0001 Illegal code for • A format that cannot be converted Correct the machine tool builder
HSPRGM was found in the machine tool macro.
builder macro indicated with the • Is WHILE DO in use?
program No. → Change to IF GOTO if in use.
• Is the macro format incorrect?
(Number of brackets [], illegal
character string, etc.)
→ Correct the program if any
mistakes are found.
0002 HSPRGM • A conversion process was • Carry out the conversion process
conversion in OP. attempted during automatic during a state other than automatic
operation. operation.
0003 HSPRGM memory • The execution type data • Delete unnecessary machine tool
over overflowed due to the memory builder macros to free some
capacity. memory space.
(2) Absolute position data warning (z73)
z73 Message A warning for the absolute position detection

Error No. Axis name system is displayed.
No.
Message Details initialization at power-off number
0001 Battery for abs The voltage of the backup battery has
data fault dropped. — Release 9F
→ Replace the battery.
I - 44
6. Alarms Related to User PLC
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

UUU Message
Sub-status 2
Sub-status 1
Message
Alarm class
Sub-status
1 2
U01 - - The PLC program is not input. Download the PLC program.
No user (Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will
PLC be applied.
U10 0x0010 - PLC scan time error Edit the PLC program size to a
Illegal PLC The scan time is 1 second or smaller size.
longer.
0x0040 - PLC program operation mode illegal Download the PLC program
A PLC program different from the having the same format as when
designated mode was the power was reset or turned ON.
downloaded.
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will
be applied.
0x0080 - PLC program code error Download the correct format PLC
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will program.
be applied.
0x0400 Number of Software illegal interrupt Turn the power ON again.
PLC The PLC program process stopped If the error is not reset, download
program abnormally due to an illegal the correct PLC program.
steps software command code.
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will
be applied.
0x800x Number of Software exception
PLC The PLC program process stopped
program abnormally due to a bus error, etc.
steps bit 0: BIN command operation error Refer to the methods for using the
bit 1: BCD command operation BCD and BIN function commands.
error
bit6: CALL/CALLS/RET Turn the power ON again.
command error If the error is not reset, download
bit7: IRET command execution the correct PLC program.
error
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) is
applied for bit 6/7.
I - 45
Sub-status
1 2
U50 The PLC program is stopped. Start the PLC program.
PLC
stopped
U55 The PLC program is stopped and not Write the PLC program into ROM.
PLC written into ROM.
stopped /
is not
saved
U60 The PLC program is not written into Write the PLC program into ROM.
Ladder is ROM.
not saved
(Note) The number of PLC program steps displayed on the screen may not match the actual number of error
occurrence steps because of the PLC program timing. Use this as a guideline of the occurrence place.
I - 46
7. Program Errors
7. Program Errors
This alarm occurs during automatic operation. If there is a mistake in the machining program creation or if a
program that does not match the NC specifications has been created, a program error will occur. The error No.
and message are displayed on the screen.
Error
No.
P10 No. of • The number of axis addresses • Divide the alarm block commands
simultaneous commanded in the same block is into two.
axes over greater than the number provided • Check the specifications.
for by the specifications.
P11 Illegal axis • The axis address names in the • Correct the axis names in the
address program commands and the axis program.
address names set in the
parameters do not match.
P20 Division error • An axis has been commanded for • Check the program.
which division cannot be made by
the command units.
P32 Illegal address • An address not contained in the • Check and correct the addresses in
specifications has been used. the program.
• Check the specifications.
P33 Format error • The command format in the program • Check the program.
is not correct.
P34 Illegal G code • A G code not contained in the • Check and correct the G code
specifications has been addresses in the program.
commanded.
P35 Setting value • The setting range of the addresses • Check the program.
range over has been exceeded.
P36 Program end • “EOR” has been read during • Enter M02 or M30 at the end of the
error memory operation. program.
• Enter M99 at the end of the
subprogram.
P37 Prog. No. and • A zero has been designated for the • The program numbers which can
sequence No. program number or for the sequence be designated range from 1 to
zero number 99999999.
• The sequence numbers which can
be designated range from 1 to
99999.
P38 No spec: • A command with /2 to /9 has been • Check the program. (The command
Optional block issued. cannot be issued with /2 to /9.)
skip
P39 No • The command issued is not included • Check the specifications.
specifications in the specifications.
P50 No spec: • A command for inch/millimeter • Check the specifications.
Inch/mm conversion has been assigned
using a G code though there is no
such G code specification.
P60 Compensation • The commanded movement • Check the value of each address in
31
length over distance is too great (it exceeds 2 ). the program.
I - 47
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P62 No F command • A cutting feedrate command or • When the power is turned ON, G01
thread lead command has not been is set as the movement modal
issued. command. Assign the feedrate
using an F command.
• Designate F with a thread lead
command.
P70 Arc radius error • The start and end points of the arc • Check the address values
and the arc center are not correct. designated for the program's start
point, end point and the arc center.
• Check the plus and minus
directions of the address value.
P71 Arc center error • The center of the arc is not found • Check the address values in the
during R-designated circular program.
interpolation.
P72 No spec: • A helical interpolation command was • Check the specifications.
Herical cutting issued though such specifications • Check the arc plane.
do not exist.
P73
P80
P90 No spec: • A thread-cutting command has • Check the specifications.
Thread cutting been assigned though such
specifications do not exist.
P91 No spec: • A variable thread-cutting command • Check the specifications.
Vrbl lead has been issued though such
thread (G34) specifications do not exist.
P92 No spec: arc • The arc thread cutting command • Check the specifications.
thread cutting was issued though such
P93 Illegal pitch • The thread lead (thread pitch) is not • Set the thread lead command
value correct when thread cutting is properly in the thread cutting
commanded. command.
P100
P110
P112 Plane selected • A plane selection command (G17, • Assign the plane selection
while R compen G18, G19) has been assigned command after canceling the tool
during a tool radius compensation radius compensation command and
command and nose R compensa- nose R compensation command (by
tion command (G41, G42, G46). issuing the G40 command).
P113 Illegal plane • The circular command axis and • Assign the circular command with
select selected plane do not match. the proper plane selection.
P120 No spec: • A synchronous feed command has • Check the synchronous feed
Synchronous been assigned though such command specifications.
feed specifications do not exist. • Change the synchronous feed
command (G95) into a per-minute
feed command (G94).
(The F command value must also
be changed.)
P121
I - 48
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P130 2nd M function • The address specified by • Check the parameter’s 2nd
code illegal parameter is other than A, B or C. miscellaneous function address.
• The name is duplicated with the • Designate an address different
axis name. from the axis address.
P131 No spec: • A constant surface speed command • Check the specifications.
Cnst perphrl (G96) has been assigned even • Change the constant surface speed
ctrl G96 though such specifications do not command (G96) into a speed
exist. command (G97).
P133 Illegal P-No.: • An illegal constant surface speed • Check the parameter and program
G96 control axis has been designated. designation for the constant surface
• An axis No. that does not exist in speed control axis.
the command system was
commanded during constant
surface speed control.
P140
P141
P142
P150 No spec: • The tool radius compensation and • Check the tool radius
Nose R nose R compensation (G41, G42, compensation and nose R
compensation G46) were issued even though the compensation specifications.
tool radius compensation and nose
R compensation specifications are
not provided.
P151 Radius compen • A compensation command (G40, • Assign a rapid traverse command
during arc G41, G42, G46) has been assigned (G00) or linear command (G01) in
mode in the circular mode (G02, G03). the compensation command block
or cancel block. (Set the modal to
linear interpolation.)
P152 No intersection • The intersection point compensation • Check the program.
vector is not found when a tool
radius compensation or nose R
compensation command (G41,
G42, G46) has been executed.
P153 Compensation • An interference error is occurred • Check the program.
interference when a tool radius compensation
and nose R compensation
command (G41, G42, G46) is
executed.
P154
P155 Fixed cyc exec • A fixed cycle command was • The radius compensation mode is
during compen assigned in the radius compensation established when a fixed cycle
mode. command is executed and so the
radius compensation cancel
command (G40) should be
assigned.
I - 49
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P156 R compen • When the G46 nose R compensa- • Change to a movement vector
direction not tion is started, the movement vector whose compensation direction is
defined has an undefined compensation defined.
direction. • Change to a tool with a different tool
nose point number.
P157 R compen • The compensation direction is • Even if the compensation direction
direction reversed during G46 nose R is reversed, change to a more
changed compensation. suitable G command (G00, G28,
G30, G33, G53).
• Change to a tool with a different tool
nose point number.
• Set the G46 no reverse error
parameter to ON.
P158 Illegal tip point • The tool nose point number is • Change to the correct tool nose
illegal (any number except 1 to 8) point number.
during G46 nose R compensation.
P159 Cmnd invalid • A command disable command has • Cancel nose R compensation
during R been issued in nose R before the block where an error
compen compensation (G41, G42, or G46) occurs.
mode.
P170 No offset • There is no compensation number • Add the compensation number
number (T ) command when a command to the compensation
compensation command (G41, command block.
G42, G46) is assigned. • Check the number of compensation
• The compensation number is number sets and correct the
greater than the number of sets in command so that it has a
the specifications. compensation number within the
number of compensation sets.
P171 No spec: • A G10 command has been assigned • Check the specifications.
G10 option even though such specifications do
not exist.
P172 G10 L number • The L address command is not • Check the G10 command address
error correct when the G10 command is L number and command the proper
assigned. number.
P173 G10 P number • A compensation number outside • First check the number of
error the number of sets in the compensation sets and then set the
specifications has been assigned address P designation to within that
for the compensation number number.
command when the G10 command
is assigned.
P180 No fixed cycle • A fixed cycle (G81 to G89) • Check the specifications.
command has been assigned • Correct the program.
though such specifications do not
exist.
P181 No spindle • The spindle speed command has • Assign the spindle speed command
command not been assigned when a hole (S) with the G84 or G88 hole drilling
(Tap cycle) drilling fixed cycle command is fixed cycle command.
assigned.
I - 50
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P182 Synchronous • Connecting is not possible with the • Check the connection with the
tap error spindle unit. spindle unit.
• A synchronous tap command was • Check whether the spindle encoder
issued for a system in the constant is present or not.
surface speed control. • Check the program.
P183 No pitch/thread • The pitch or thread number • Assign the pitch or thread number
number command is not present in the tap command using the F or E
cycle of the hole drilling fixed cycle command.
command.
P184 Pitch/thread • An incorrect pitch or thread number • Check the pitch or thread number.
number error command has been assigned in the
tap cycle of the hole drilling fixed
cycle command.
P190 No spec: • A turning cycle command has been • Check the specifications.
Cutting cycle assigned though the turning cycle • Delete the turning cycle command.
specifications are not provided.
P191 Taper length • There is an error in the taper length • Set the setting value of R in the
error command when the turning cycle turning cycle command to less than
command is assigned. the movement amount of the axis.
P192 Chamfering • The chamfering conducted during • Set a chamfering amount which
error the thread cutting cycle is illegal. does not protrude from the cycle.
P200 No spec: • A compound fixed cycle command • Check the specifications.
MRC cycle (G70 to G73) has been assigned
even though the compound fixed
cycle specifications are not
provided.
P201 Program error • One or more of the following • Delete the following G codes from
(MRC) commands are present in the the subprogram which has been
subprogram which has been called called by the compound fixed cycle
by the compound fixed cycle: (G70 to G76) : G27, G28, G30,
1. Reference point return commands G31. G33, G code in fixed cycle.
(G27, G28, G30), • Delete G2 and G3 from the first
2. Thread cutting (G33), movement block of the finish shape
program in compound fixed cycle.
3. Fixed cycle,
4. Skip function (G31).
• The first movement block of the
finish shape program in compound
fixed cycle contains a circular
command.
P202 Block over • The number of blocks in the shape • Make the number of blocks in the
(MRC) program which has been called by shape program which has been
the compound fixed cycle exceeds called by the compound fixed cycle
50. (G70 to G73) less than 50.
P203 D cmnd figure • The shape program of the • Check the shape program in the
error (MRC) compound fixed cycle (G70 to G73) compound fixed cycle (G70 to
does not give the shape which can G73).
be cut properly.
I - 51
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P204 E cmnd fixed • The command value in the • Check the command value in the
cycle error compound fixed cycle (G70 to G76) compound fixed cycle (G70 to
(MRC) is not correct. G76).
P210 No spec: • A compound fixed cycle command • Check the specifications.
Pattern cycle has been assigned though the
compound fixed cycle (G74 to G76)
specifications are not provided.
P230 Sub-program • The number of times subprograms • Check the number of subprogram
nesting over have been called in sequence from calls and correct the program so
subprograms has exceeded 8. that it does not exceed 8.
P231 No sequence • The sequence number commanded • Enter the sequence number in the
No. by GOTO has not been set when appropriate block.
calling out a subprogram or when
returning to the main program from
a subprogram.
P232 No program No. • The subprogram has not been • Register the subprogram.
registered when it is called.
P240 No spec: • A variable command has been • Check the specifications.
Variable assigned though such specifications • Delete the variable command.
command (# ) do not exist.
P241 No variable No. • The commanded variable number • Check the specifications.
is higher than the variable numbers • Check the program variable
in the specifications. numbers.
P242 “ = “ not defined • “ = “ has not been commanded • Set “ = “ into the program variable
at vrble set when a variable is defined. definition.
P243 Can't use • Even though the hypothetical • Review the program.
variables coordinates were set, the basic
coordinate system position
information was read during end
point synchronization.
P250
P251
P252
P260
P270 No spec: • A macro specification command • Check the specifications.
User macro has been assigned though such • Delete the macro command.
P271 No spec: • A macro interrupt command has • Check the specifications.
Macro been issued though it is not included
interrupt in the specifications.
P272 NC and macro • An NC statement and a macro • Check the program, and program
texts in a block statement exist in the same block. so that the NC statement and
macro statement are in separate
blocks.
P273 Macro call • The maximum number of macro call • Check the program and correct so
nesting over nesting levels have been exceeded. that the macro calls do not exceed
the number of levels provided for by
the specifications.
I - 52
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P275 Macro • There are too many argument sets • Check the program.
argument over in macro call argument type II.
P276 Illegal G67 • A G67 command has been assigned • Check the program.
command though it is not during the G66 • The G67 command serves to cancel
command modal. the call and so the G66 command is
assigned before this command.
P277 Macro alarm • An alarm command has been issued • Check the user macro program.
message in user macro.
P280 Brackets [ ] • More than 5 bracket “ [ “ or “ ] • Check the program and correct so
nesting over “ parentheses have been used in a that the number of “ [ “ or “ ]
block. “ parentheses does not exceed 5
brackets.
P281 Brackets [ ] not • The number of the “ [ “ or “ ] • Check the program and correct so
paired “ parentheses commanded in a that the numbers of “ [ “ and “ ]
block does not match. “ parentheses are paired off
properly.
P282 Calculation • An operation formula is not correct. • Check the program and correct the
impossible operation formula.
P283 Divided by zero • The division denominator is zero. • Check the program and correct so
that the denominator for division in
the operation formula is not zero.
P284 Integer value • In the process of operation the • Check the operation formula in the
overflow integer value has exceeded –231 program and correct so that the
(231–1). value of the integers after the
operation does not exceed –231.
P285 Float value • There is a variable data overflow. • Check the variable data in the
overflow program.
P290 IF sentence • There is an error in the IF • Check the program.
error [<conditional formula>] GOTO
statement.
P291 WHILE • There is an error in the WHILE [< • Check the program.
sentence error conditional formula>] DO to
END statement.
P292 SETVN • The variable name setting or • Check the program.
sentence error SETVN statement is incorrect. • Make sure that the variable name of
the SETVN statement has 7 or fewer
characters.
P293 DO-END • The numbers of ’s in the DO and • Check the program and correct so
nesting over END of the WHILE [<conditional that the nesting levels of DO to
formula>] DO to END statement END statements does not exceed
(nesting levels) has been exceeded 27.
27.
P294 DO and END • The DO and END are not paired off • Check the program and correct so
not paired properly. that the DO and END are paired off
properly.
I - 53
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P300 Variable name • A variable name has not been • Correct the program so that the
illegal commanded properly. variable name is correct.
• Check the variable names in the
program and correct them.
P301 Variable name • A variable name has been • Correct the program so that the
duplicated duplicated. variable names are not duplicated.
P340 Coordinate • Even though there is a tool offset • Review the machining program.
parameter amount, the coordinate system • Turn the setup parameter #8053
illegal setting command (G92) was issued CONTROL BIT6 ON.
immediately after the double-turret
mirror image mode change
command was issued.
P370 No spec: • An opposite tool rest mirror image • Check the specifications.
Mirr image command (G68) has been
dubl turet assigned though the double-turret
mirror image specifications are not
provided.
P380 No spec: • A corner chamfering (C) or corner • Check the specifications.
Corner R/C rounding (R) command has been • Remove “corner R” and “corner C”
assigned though the corner from the program.
chamfering and corner rounding I
and II specifications do not exist.
P381 No spec: • A corner chamfering (C) or corner • Check the specifications.
Arc R/C rounding (R) command has been
assigned in a circular interpolation
block though the corner chamfering
and corner rounding II
P382 No corner • There is no movement command in • Assign the block following the
movement the block following the corner corner R/C command in the block
chamfering/rounding. with movement.
P383 Corner • The movement distance is shorter • Since the movement distance is
movement than the corner R/C command shorter than the corner R/C, the
short when such a command is assigned. corner R/C should be reduced to
less than the movement distance.
P384 Corner next • With a corner R/C command, the • Since the movement distance in the
movement movement distance in the following following block is shorter than the
short block is shorter than the corner corner R/C, the corner R/C should
R/C. be made less than the movement
distance.
P385 Corner during • G0 or G33 is contained in the block • Check the program.
G0/G33 following the corner R/C.
P390 No spec: • A geometric command has been • Check the specifications.
Geometric issued while geometric I is not
included in the specifications.
P391 No spec: • A geometric command has been • Check the specifications.
Geometric arc issued while geometric II is not
included in the specifications.
I - 54
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P392 Angle<1 degree • The difference in the angle between • Correct the geometric angle.
(GEOMT) geometric lines is less than 1
degree.
P393 Inc value in 2nd • The commands in the second • Assign the commands in the
block (GEOMT) geometric block have been second geometric block as
assigned as incremental values. absolute values.
P394 No linear move • There is no linear command in the • Assign the linear command (G01)
command second geometric block. in the second block.
(GEOMT)
P395 Illegal address • The geometric format is incorrect. • Check the program.
(GEOMT)
P396 Plane selected • A plane selection command was • Select the plane before issuing the
in GEOMT ctrl assigned in the geometric geometric command.
command.
P397 Arc error • The arc end point did not contact or • Check the previous and next
(GEOMT) intersect with the next block's start commands including the geometric
point during geometric IB, II. arc command.
P398 No spec: • The geometric command was • Check the specifications.
Geometric 1B issued when the geometric IB
specifications were not available.
P399 Direction error • The monotone is not incremented • Check the program so that the
(GEOMT) or decremented in geometric II. monotone is incremented or
decremented.
P410 No spec: • The specifications for converting • Check the specifications.
Address absolute/incremental axis
convertor addresses do not exist.
P420 No spec: • A parameter input command has • Check the specifications.
Parameter been assigned though such
input specifications do not exist.
P421 Parameter input • The commanded parameter number • Check the program.
error and setting data is illegal.
• An illegal G command address has
been assigned in the parameter
input mode.
• A parameter input command has
been assigned during a fixed cycle
modal or nose R compensation.
P430 Zero return not • A movement command except • Execute the reference point return
completed reference point return has been manually.
assigned for an axis which has not
returned to the reference point.
P431 No spec: • A 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point • Check the specifications.
2, 3, 4th return command has been
ref-point ret assigned though such
P432 No spec: G29 • A start position return command • Check the specifications.
(G29) has been assigned though
such specifications do not exist.
I - 55
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P433 No spec: G27 • A zero point check command (G27) • Check the specifications.
has been assigned though such
P434 Compare error • There is an axis which does not • Check the program.
return to the zero point position
when the zero point check
command (G27) is executed.
P435 G27 and M • An M independent command has • An M independent command cannot
commands in a been assigned simultaneously in be assigned in the G27 command
block the G27 command block. block and so the G27 command and
M independent command should be
divided into separate blocks.
P436 G29 and M • An M independent command has • An M independent command cannot
commands in a been assigned simultaneously in be assigned in the G29 command
block the G29 command block. block and so the G29 command and
M independent command should be
divided into separate blocks.
P450 No spec: • A chuck barrier valid command • Check the specifications.
Chuck barrier (G22) has been assigned though
the chuck barrier specifications are
not provided.
P459 External I/O • A timeout error occurred in the • Check the external input/output
timeout external input/output device. device.
• Check the timeout time parameter.
P460 Tape I/O error • An error has occurred in the tape • Check the power and cables for the
reader or in the printer during connected units.
macro printing. • Check the Input/output parameters.
P461 No file data • The machining program file cannot • Review the machining program.
be read or the file cannot be found. • The program saved in the memory
may be damaged. Output all of the
necessary data, such as the
machining programs, tool data and
workpiece offset data, to an
external device, and then format.
P462 Computer link • A communication error occurred in • Reset the system.
error the computer link.
P480 No spec: Milling • No milling function specifications • Check the specifications.
are found.
P481 Illegal G code • An invalid G code was commanded • Remove the illegal G command.
(mill) in the milling mode.
P482 Illegal axis (mill) • A rotation axis command was issued • Delete the rotation axis command.
in the milling mode. • Check the milling axis number.
• Alternatively, milling was performed
though an illegal value was set for
the milling axis number.
I - 56
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P483 Cancel shift X • The milling mode was turned ON • Review the program.
(mill) before the tool offset operation was • Complete tool offset before
completed or in the offset entering the milling mode.
temporary cancel state.
P484 ZRN not • A movement command was issued • Manually return the axis to the
completed (mill) in milling mode to the axis that had reference point.
not completed return to the
reference point.
P485 Illegal modal • The system entered in milling mode • Before issuing G12.1, issue G40
(mill) during nose R compensation or (nose R compensation cancel) or
constant surface speed control. G97 (constant surface speed
• A T command was issued in milling cancel).
mode. • Before issuing G12.1, issue a T
• The milling mode was changed to command.
the turning mode during tool radius • Before issuing G13.1, issue G40
compensation. (tool radius compensation cancel).
P500 No spec: • A cross machining command • Check the specifications.
Cross (G110) was issued though it was
machining not included in the specifications.
(G110)
P501 Cross (G110) • A cross machining command • Check the program.
impossible (G110) was issued in nose R,
milling, balance cut, fixed cycle, or
double-turret mirror image mode.
P502 Illegal G110 • An illegal axis system number was • Correct the program address.
$No. commanded.
P503 Illegal G110 • The commanded axis was not • Correct the program address.
axis found.
• Too many axes were commanded.
• The commanded axis cannot be
controlled by the commanded
system.
P510 Illegal • During the axis movement • Check the program.
G128/G129 synchronous superimposition
axis command (G128, G129), the
synchronous superimposing axis is
not between the start position and
the end position of synchronous
superimposition.
• A rotation axis was commanded for
the synchronous superimposing
axis or master axis.
P511 Illegal • The axis movement synchronous • Check the program.
$-command superimposition command (G128,
G129) was issued in a system that
does not contain a synchronous
superimposing axis.
I - 57
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P520 No TGSET • A position control command (G132) • Check the program.
value or position control variable skip
command (G133) was issued
before a set number specification
(TGSET[ ]) command.
P521 Illegal G code • One of G130 to G133 was issued • Check the program.
(G130) during nose R compensation (G41,
G42, or G46), thread cutting (G33),
fixed cycle (G70 to G79, or G81 to
G89), or milling (G12.1) modal.
P600 No spec: • An automatic tool length • Check the specifications.
Auto TLM measurement command (G37) has
been assigned through such
P601 No spec: Skip • A skip command (G31/G160) has • Check the specifications.
been assigned though such
P602 No spec: • A multiple skip command (G31.1, • Check the specifications.
Multi skip G31.2, G31.3) was assigned
though no such command exists in
the specifications.
P603 Skip speed 0 • The skip speed is zero. • Command the skip speed.
P604 G37 illegal axis • The axis has not been commanded • Command only one axis.
in the automatic tool length
measurement block or, alternatively,
two or more axes have been
commanded.
P605 H and G37 • The T code is in the same block as • Assign the T command before the
commands in a the automatic tool length block which contains the automatic
block measurement command. tool length measurement
command.
P606 H command not • The T code has still not been • Assign the T command before the
found before commanded for automatic tool block which contains the automatic
G37 length measurement. tool length measurement
command.
P607 Signal turned • The measurement position arrival • Check the program.
illegally by G37 signal has been set ON before the
area commanded by the parameter
deceleration area “d” or D
command.
• Alternatively, the signal was not set
ON until the end.
P608 Skip during • The skip command was assigned • Assign the radius compensation
radius compen during a radius compensation or cancel or nose R compensation
nose R compensation command. cancel command (G40) or remove
the skip command.
P609 Illegal skip axis • An axis was not commanded in the • Command only one axis.
G160 block, or two or more axes
were commanded.
I - 58
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P700 No B, N number • When using the end point • Check the program.
synchronization function, the
designated block's identification
number was not found at the end
point block.
P710 Inclined ax ctrl • The G170/G171 command was • Check the program.
mode illegal issued in the milling mode, nose R
mode, mirror image, compound
fixed cycle or constant surface
speed control mode.
P711 Coordinate • The hypothetical coordinate setting The hypothetical coordinate setting
conver was commanded in a mode in and the hypothetical coordinate
prohibited which the hypothetical coordinates cancel command were executed in
cannot be set. the following modes. Cancel the
• Inclined coordinate rotation was mode.
commanded in a mode in which the • Mirror image is applied on the
inclined coordinate rotation cannot imaginary coordinate target axis.
be commanded. • The fixed cycle mode is active.
• The milling mode is active.
• The nose R compensation mode is
active.
The inclined coordinate rotation
command and inclined coordinate
rotation cancel command were
executed in the following modes.
Cancel the mode.
• Mirror image is applied on the
inclined coordinate rotation target
axis.
• The fixed cycle mode is active.
active.
I - 59
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P712 Invalid axis of • An illegal G code was commanded One of the following commands was
coord conver during hypothetical coordinate executed during the hypothetical
setting. coordinate setting.
• An illegal command was issued • Automatic reference point return
during the inclined coordinate (G28/G29)
rotation mode. • 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point return
(G30)
• Reference point check (G27)
• Arbitrary axis exchange (G140)
A command that changes the
hypothetical coordinate target axis to
a non-control axis was executed.
• Current value sampling (G159)
• Torque skip (G160)
• Collision detection (G161)
One of the following commands was
executed during the inclined
coordinate rotation mode.
• Milling command (G12.1)
• Thread cutting command
• Hobbing command
• Automatic reference point return
(G28/G29)
• 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point return
(G30)
• Reference point check (G27)
• Tool position return command
• Mirror image command
• Compound type turning cycle (G70
to G76)
• Skip command (G31)
• Arbitrary axis exchange (G140)
A command that changes the inclined
coordinate rotation target axis to a
non-control axis was executed.
• Current value sampling (G159)
• Torque skip (G160)
• Collision detection (G161)
P718 TDO illegal • An arc command was issued for the • An arc command was issued for the
startup tool axis direction tool length offset tool axis direction tool length offset
startup command. startup command. Change the arc
command to a linear command.
I - 60
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P719 TDO ctrl axis • An illegal value was set for the tool • Check the plane selection
illegal axis direction tool length offset parameters #8001 (I axis) and
target axis. #8003 (K axis).
• Confirm that the tool axis direction
tool length offset parameter #1182
(bt_axname) is a rotary axis.
P720 TDO command • Tool axis direction tool length offset The tool axis direction tool length
prohibited was commanded in an illegal mode. offset start command or cancel
command was executed in one of the
following modes. Cancel the mode.
• Mirror image is applied on the tool
axis direction tool length offset
target axis.
active.
• The thread cutting mode is active.
• The end point synchronization
mode is active.
• The tool axis direction tool length
offset mode is active.
• The tool offset amount is not
commanded. Command G174 after
the tool offset command (T
command).
• The tool-spindle synchronization II
(hobbing) mode is active.
P721 Illegal • An illegal command was executed One of the following commands was
command in during the tool axis direction tool executed during the tool axis
TDO mode length offset modal. direction tool length offset modal.
• Milling command (G12.1)
• Thread cutting command
• Automatic reference point return
command (G28/G29)
• 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point return
command (G30)
• Reference point check command
(G27)
• Mirror image command
• Compound type turning cycle (G70
to G76)
• Skip command (G31)
• Inclined coordinate rotation
command (G173)
• Automatic tool length measurement
(G37)
• Double-turret mirror image
command
• T command double-turret mirror
image command
• Tool-spindle synchronization II
(hobbing) command
I - 61
7. Program Errors
Error
No.
P970 Illegal • The target axis was exchanged • Check the program.
command in upon issuance of the arbitrary axis
G181/G182 exchange command during
interference avoidance G0 speed
control.
• Interference avoidance G0 speed
control was executed during
superimposition or synchronization.
Control axis superimposition was
executed during interference
avoidance G0 speed control.
P971 G181/G182 G181/G182 is commanded in the • Check the program.
command following modes.
prohibited • The fixed cycle mode is active.
• The end point synchronization
mode is active.
• The tool radius compensation or
nose R compensation is carried
out.
• The constant surface speed control
is active.
P980 Illegal • During subprogram call involving • Review the machine tool builder
HSPRGM call nesting, the execution format data macros.
machine tool builder macro and EIA
machine tool builder macro were
called out alternately.
P981 Illegal • A G code incompatible with • Review the machine tool builder
HSPRGM execution type data was macros.
program commanded. • Review the G code series setting.
• The return destination sequence No. (The execution type data can be
was commanded with the program used only with the G code series 1.)
return command M99 called out
from the execution type data.
• Execution type data was executed
when the G code series was set to
a value other than 1.
P982 HSPRGM • The machine tool builder macro • Start the EIA → execution type data
conversion conversion process has not been conversion process.
incomplete completed.
P990 PREPRO error • Combining commands that • Reduce the number of commands
required pre-reading (nose R that require pre-reading or delete
compensation, corner such commands.
chamfering/corner rounding (R),
geometric I, geometric IB, and
compound fixed cycle commands)
resulted in eight or more pre-read
blocks.
I - 62
8. Auxiliary Axis Alarms
Display example
AS01 Aux axis servo alarm
Axis No. 1 to 4
Alarm information
(Follows MR-J2-CT alarm information)
(1) AS01 Aux axis servo alarm

Alarm
information
0011 PCB error An error occurred in the drive • Replace servo drive unit.
(Control circuit err) unit's internal PCB.
0013 S/W processing An error occurred in the drive • Replace servo drive unit.
timeout unit's internal reference clock.
0016 Motor Motor type error • Use a correct drive unit and motor
type/encoder type combination.
error Detector initial communication • Connect correctly.
error. • Replace the motor.
• Replace or repair cable.
Detector CPU error • Replace the motor (detector).
(A/D conv ini error) unit's internal A/D converter.
0025 Absolute position An error occurred in the • Turn the power ON for 2 to 3
lost detector's internal absolute minutes while the alarm is
position data. occurring, and then turn the
power ON again.
• Replace the battery, and initialize
the absolute position again.
0034 CRC error An error occurred in the • Take countermeasures against
communication with the NC. noise.
0036 Commu time out, Communication with the NC was • Connect correctly.
NC down cut off. • Turn the NC power ON.
• Replace the drive unit or NC.
0037 Parameter error The parameter setting value is • Set the parameter correctly.
incorrect.
0038 Communication An error occurred in the • Take countermeasures against
frame error communication with the NC. noise.
0039 Communication Undefined data was transferred • Change the NC software version
INFO error from the NC. to a compatible version.
I - 63

Alarm
information
(Drive circuit error) unit's internal PCB.
0013 S/W processing An error occurred in the drive • Replace servo drive unit.
timeout unit's internal reference clock.
0015 EEROM error A write error occurred to the • Replace servo drive unit.
EEROM in the drive unit.
(A/D conv error) unit's internal A/D converter.
(LSI error) unit's internal LSI.
0020 Encoder error An error occurred in the • Connect correctly.
communication between the • Replace or repair cable.
servo drive unit and detector.
0024 Ground fault A ground fault of the output was • Repair the ground fault section.
detection detected when the power was • Replace the cable or motor.
turned ON.

Alarm
information
0010 Undervoltage The power voltage is 160V or less. • Review the power supply.
• Replace the servo drive unit.
0030 Regeneration error The tolerable regeneration power • Set the parameter #002 correctly.
of the internal regenerative • Connect correctly.
resistor or external regenerative
option was exceeded. • Lower the positioning frequency.
• Change the regenerative option
to a larger capacity.
• Lower the load.
• Review the power supply.
Regenerative transistor error • Replace the servo drive unit.
0031 Overspeed The motor's rotation speed • Increase the acceleration/
exceeded the tolerable deceleration time constant.
momentary speed. • Review the gear ratio.
• Replace the detector.
0032 Overcurrent A current exceeding the servo • Repair the wiring.
drive unit's tolerable current • Replace the servo drive unit.
flowed.
• Take countermeasures against
noise.
I - 64
Alarm
information
0033 Overvoltage The voltage of the converter in the • Wire correctly.
servo drive unit was 400V or • Replace the servo drive unit.
more.
• For the internal regenerative
resistor, replace the drive unit.
• For the external regenerative
option, replace the regenerative
option.
0046 Motor overheating An operation state causing the • Reduce the motor load.
motor to overheat continued. • Review the operation pattern.
0050 Overload 1 The servo drive unit or • Reduce the motor load.
servomotor overload protection • Review the operation pattern.
function activated.
• Change to a motor or drive unit
with large output.
• Change the setting of the
automatic tuning response
characteristics.
• Correct the connection.
• Replace the servomotor.
0051 Overload 2 The max. output current flowed • Review the operation pattern.
for several seconds due to a • Change the setting of the
machine collision or overload. automatic tuning response
characteristics.
• Correct the connection.
0052 Excessive error A position deflection exceeding • Increase the acceleration/
the excessive error detection deceleration time constant.
setting value occurred. • Increase the torque limit value.
• Review the power facility capacity.
• Review the operation pattern.
• Connect correctly.
• Repair or replace the cable.
I - 65
(4) as52 Aux axis servo warning

Alarm
information
0092 Battery voltage The absolute position detection • Mount a battery.
drop battery voltage dropped. • Replace the battery and initialize
the absolute position.
00E0 Overregeneration The regeneration power may have • Lower the positioning frequency.
warning exceeded the tolerable range of • Change the regenerative option
the built-in regenerative resistor or to a larger one.
external regenerative option.
• Lower the load.
00E1 Overload warning The overload alarm 1 could occur. • Refer to the items for S03 0050.
00E3 Abs position There is an error in the absolute • Take countermeasures against
counter warning position detector internal data. noise.
00E9 Main circuit OFF The servo ON signal was input • Turn ON the main circuit power.
warning while the main circuit power was
OFF.
The contactor operation is faulty.
(5) AZ70 Aux axis ABS parameter error

Alarm
information
0001 Zero pt ini The zero point (reference point) • Initialize the zero point (reference
incomplete has not been initialized in the point).
absolute position system.
0002 Abs posn data lost The absolute position coordinate • Initialize the zero point (reference
data in the drive unit has been point).
lost.
0003 Abs posn system The absolute position system • Correctly set the parameters and
para error related parameters have been then initialize the zero point
changed or lost. (reference point).
(6) AZ71 Aux axis battery voltage drop

Alarm
information
0001 Abs posn encoder The data in the detector has been • Check the battery and detector
data lost lost. cable and then initialize the zero
Battery voltage drop. point (reference point).
Detector cable wire breakage or
looseness.
I - 66
(7) AZ73 Aux axis system warning

Alarm
information
0001 Abs posn battery Battery voltage drop. • Check the battery and detector
voltage drop Detector cable wire breakage or cable. The zero point does not
looseness. need to be initialized.
0003 Abs posn counter An error occurred in the • Replace the detector.
warning detector's absolute position
counter.
(8) am01 Aux axis operation alarm

Alarm
information
0001 Dog overrun When executing dog-type • Lower the zero point return speed
reference point, the zero point or increase the dog length.
return speed is too fast or the dog
length is too short.
0003 Reference point When executing reference point • Move the axis in the correct
return illegal return, the axis was moved in the direction.
opposite of the designated
direction.
0004 External interlock The axis interlock function is valid. • Cancel the interlock signal
axis exists
0005 Internal interlock An interlock was established by • Cancel the servo OFF.
axis exists the servo OFF function.
0007 S/W stroke end The soft limit was reached. • Check the soft limit setting and
axis exists machine position
0024 R-pnt ret invld at Reference point return was • Initialize the absolute position
abs pos alm executed during an absolute reference point and then fix the
position alarm. absolute position coordinates.
0025 R-pnt ret invld at Reference point return was • Initialize the absolute position
zero pt ini executed while initializing the reference point and then fix the
absolute position. absolute position coordinates.
0101 Ope mode The operation mode is not • Correctly designate the operation
non-selected designated, or the operation mode.
mode was changed during axis
movement.
0103 Feed rate zero The operation parameter's • Set a value other than zero in the
feedrate setting is zero. feedrate setting or override value.
The operation parameter
feedrate setting is zero.
Or, the override is valid, and the
override value is zero.
I - 67
Alarm
information
0160 Station No. illegal A station No. exceeding the No. of • Correctly designate the station No.
indexed divisions was designated.
0161 Zero return not Automatic/manual operation was • Execute the reference point
completed started before reference point return.
return was executed with the
incremental system.
0162 In abs posn initial The start signal was input while • Complete the absolute position
setting initializing the absolute position reference point initialization.
reference point.
0163 In absolute The start signal was input during • Initialize the absolute position
position alarm an absolute position alarm. reference point and then fix the
absolute position coordinates.
0164 In random The manual operation mode was • Turn the random positioning
positioning mode started during the random mode OFF before switching to
positioning mode. the manual operation mode.
0165 Uneven index The commanded station No. was • Check the commanded station
station No ilgl higher than 8 during uneven No.
indexing.
(9) AY03 AMP unequipped

Y03 AUX AMP UNEQU. Check the auxiliary axis drive unit mounting state.
• Check the end of the cable wiring.
The drive unit is not correctly • Check the cable for broken wires.
connected. • Check the connector insertion.
The auxiliary axis drive unit input power is not being input.
The auxiliary axis drive unit axis No. switch is illegal.
Error No. Details
Axis No.1 to 6 bit correspondence (bit 0 : 1st axis, bit 1: 2nd axis, bit 2: 3rd axis, bit 3: 4th axis,
bit 4: 5th axis, bit 5: 6th axis)
(10) AQ01 Aux axis emergency stop

Alarm
information
0001 External External emergency stop was Check the external emergency stop.
emergency stop input.
0002 PLC emergency PLC emergency stop was input. Check the PLC emergency stop.
stop
I - 68
II User Parameters
1. Control Parameter
Select the item and press the menu key ON or OFF .

For parameters indicated with a "(PR)" in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The setting is
validated after the power is turned ON again.
(Note) On the screen, the parameter which needs the NC power to be turned OFF displays "asterisk (*)"
to the end of the parameter name.
# Item Setting Details

8101 G00 dry run 1 The external manual feedrate is enabled in respect to rapid traverse
(G0, G27, G28, G29, G30, G53).
0 The "rapid traverse rate ∗ rapid traverse override value" set in the
Machine parameters is applied.
8102 Macro single 1 The macro block is handled as one block. The single block
operation can be stopped at each macro block.
0 The macro block is not handled as one block. The program is
processed at a high speed.
8103 Middle point 1 During G28 or G30 reference point return command, the middle
ignore point designated in the program is ignored, and the axis returns
directly to the reference point.
0 During G28 or G30 the program designation is followed, and the
axis returns to the reference point via the middle point.
8104
8105 Machine lock 1 When carrying out automatic operation in the machine lock state,
rapid the feedrate becomes the machine lock speed. The machine lock
speed is set with the Machine parameter's Axis specification
parameter "#2001 rapid".
0 During machine lock, the feedrate is the commanded speed, and is
the same process time as normal automatic operation.
8106 ABS/INC Addr. 1 The absolute/incremental changeover is carried out with the
address set in the parameters.
0 The absolute/incremental changeover is carried out with the G code
(G90/G91).
8107 G04 time fixed 1 The G04 command is a time designation in both the synchronous
feed mode (G95) and asynchronous feed mode (G94).
0 The G04 command is a time designation in the asynchronous feed
mode (G94), and a rotation designation in the synchronous feed
mode (G95).
8108 Rad compen 1 During the nose R compensation interference check, the path is
intrf byp changed so that the workpiece is not cut into by the tool radius.
0 During the nose R compensation interference check, if the block is
determined to cause cutting into the workpiece by the tool radius,
an alarm is generated before execution, and the operation stops.
8109
II - 1

8110 Decimal point 1 1 of a position command data without a decimal point command is
type 2 controlled as 1mm (1 inch).
0 1 of a position command data without a decimal point command is
controlled as the minimum input command unit (0.01mm, 0.001mm
or 0.0001mm) designated in the specifications.
8111
8112
8113 G0 1 When positioning in the G00 mode, each axis independently moves
interpolation at the respective rapid traverse rate. The path is not linear in
OFF respect to the end point.
0 When positioning in the G00 mode, the axis moves at the shortest
distance linearly in respect to the end point.
8114 Precision thrd 1 When cutting an inch thread, address E designates the precision
cut E lead.
0 When cutting an inch thread, address E designates the number of
threads per inch.
8115 Radius compen 1 When nose R compensation or executing start up or a cancel
type B command during radius compensation, the intersecting point of the
command block and next command block is operated.
0 When nose R compensation or executing start up or a cancel
command during radius compensation, the start up or cancel
command block are not targets for the intersecting point operation.
The offset vector in the command right angle direction is applied.
8116 Ext 1 Even if the machine interface signal's external deceleration signal is
deceleration input, it is ignored. (The machine's rapid traverse rate is not
OFF decelerated.)
0 When the external deceleration signal is input, the machine's
feedrate decelerates to the speed set with the Machine parameters.
8117 Initial inch 1 The inch command mode is entered as the default when the power
(PR) is turned ON.
(Inch settings are used for the parameters and compensation
amounts, etc.)
0 The metric command mode is entered as the default when the
power is turned ON.
(The input setting unit is also a metric setting.)
8118 Initial absolute 1 The absolute value command mode is the initial state when the
val power is turned ON.
0 The incremental value command mode is the initial state when the
power is turned ON.
8119 Initial synchr 1 The synchronous feed mode is the initial state when the power is
feed turned ON.
0 The asynchronous feed mode is the initial state when the power is
turned ON.
II - 2

8120 Init cnst prphl 1 The constant surface speed control mode is the initial state when
spd the power is turned ON.
0 The constant surface speed control cancel mode is the initial state
when the power is turned ON.
8121 Initial Z-X plane 1 G18 (plane selection ZX) mode is the initial state when the power is
turned ON.
0 G17 (plane selection XY) mode or G19 (plane selection YZ) mode
is the initial state when the power is turned ON.
8122 Initial Y-Z plane 1 G19 (plane selection YZ) mode is the initial state when the power is
turned ON.
0 G17 (plane selection XY) mode or G18 (plane selection ZX) mode
is the initial state when the power is turned ON.
8123 Initial G00 1 G00 (positioning) mode is the initial state when the power is turned
ON.
0 G01 (linear interpolation) mode is the initial state when the power is
turned ON.
8124
8125 G83/87 rapid 1 After completing each step in the deep hole drilling cycle, the axis
returns by "d" (parameter setting), and then the next step is
executed.
0 After completing each step in the deep hole drilling cycle, the axis
returns to the R point, and then the next step is executed.
8126 Fixed cycle 1 During the Fixed cycle mode, movement to the hole drilling position
modal follows the NC unit modal state (G0, G01).
0 During the Fixed cycle mode, the axis is positioned to the hole
drilling position with G00.
8127 Lathe cycle 1 If there is a block without movement in the lathe cycle (G77 to G79)
mode mode, the same process (G77 to G79) is carried out again. (G code
type 2)
0 If there is a block without movement in the lathe cycle (G77 to G79)
mode, the lathe cycle is not executed.
8128
8129 Synchronous 1 The synchronous tapping is controlled.

tapping 0 The synchronous tapping is not controlled.
8130 T-life manage 1 The tool life management is controlled.
valid 0 The tool life management is not controlled.
8131
8132
8133 G code type 1 Select the G code series 1 to 3.

8134 G code type 2 The standard G code is type 2.
8135 G code type 3 Type 3 is for additional specifications.
II - 3

8136 Interrupt amt 1 By pressing the reset button, the amount interrupted with manual or
reset handle feed (when manual ABS is OFF) is cleared to zero. (The
coordinate system deviated by the interruption are returned to the
original values.)
0 Even if the reset button is pressed, the amount interrupted with
manual or handle feed (when manual ABS is OFF) is held. (The
coordinate system deviated by the interruption are held.)
8137 G46 no reverse 1 In cases when the compensation direction reverses during G46
error execution, when an error occurs it will not be interpreted as an
error. Instead the process will be executed in the same
compensation direction.
0 In cases when the compensation direction reverses during G46
execution, an error will occur.
8138
8139 Shortcut(RT) 1 Moves with a shortcut to the end point. (Only absolute value
command with rapid traverse.)
0 Moves to the end point according to the command direction.
8140 Edit lock B 1 Editing of a label No. 8000 to 9999 machining program is locked.
0 Editing of a label No. 8000 to 9999 machining program is enabled.
8141
8142 Start point 1 If the operation start point cannot be obtained, a program error will
alarm occur.
0 The process starts after the movement block is completed.
8143
8144 Milling G16 1 The default value for the plane selection is set to the G16 plane
when starting the milling mode.
0 The default value for the plane selection is set to the G17 plane
8145 Milling G19 1 The default value for the plane selection is set to the G19 plane
0 The default value for the plane selection is set to the G17 plane
8146
to
8157
II - 4

8158 Tool set type 2 1 If data without a decimal point (ex., 1) is set on the Tool offset or
Wear compensation screen, the data will be input as 1.000
(1mm/inch).
0 If data without a decimal point (ex., 1) is set on the Tool offset or
Wear compensation screen, the data will be input as the minimum
setting unit determined by the specifications.
8159
8160 Spindle C Gain 1 In spindle/C axis control, the servo gain of the part system including
chg. the superimposition/synchronous axis is not changed to spindle
synchronization position loop gain when changing of the position
loop gain for the axis other than C axis is valid.
0 In spindle/C axis control, the servo gain of the part system including
the superimposition/synchronous axis is changed to spindle
synchronization position loop gain by the superimposition/
synchronization command when changing of the position loop gain
for the axis other than C axis is valid.
II - 5
2. Axis Parameters
2. Axis Parameters
Set the necessary parameters for each axis.
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
8201 Mirror image In memory and MDI operation, this highlights the symbol 0 : Mirror image invalid
for the next block movement data (incremental amount). 1 : Mirror image valid
8202 Automatic The first reference point return is always dog-type, but 0 : High-speed return
dog type this selects either dog-type or high-speed (memory type) 1 : Dog-type return
for the second and subsequent reference point returns.
8203 Manual dog This sets the manual reference point return method for 0 : High-speed return
type the function above. 1 : Dog-type return
8204 Axis removal Not used. 0
8205
to
8206
8207 Soft limit The values set for parameters No.8208 and No.8209 are 0: Soft limit valid
invalid ignored. 1: Soft limit invalid
8208 Soft limit (-) The movable range in the negative and positive directions ±99999.999 (mm)
8209 Soft limit (+) from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate
system is set for each axis.
If the same value (other
than 0) is set for
No.8208 and No.8209,
X+
this function will be
Basic machine
invalidated.
M
coordinate system (Example)
Z– Z+ No.8208 = 10.
Movable area No.8209 = 10.
X–
8210
8211
II - 6
3. Setup Parameter
3. Setup Parameter
(Note) On the screen, the parameter which needs the NC power to be turned OFF displays "asterisk (*)"
to the end of the parameter name.
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
8001 Plane <I> These set the control axis addresses corresponding to the X, Z, Y and other
8002 <J> plane selection. control axis addresses
8003 <K> The tool compensation axis becomes the axis set in I, J,
and K.
8004 Aux-plane <I> These set the parallel axis addresses corresponding to the
8005 <J> above setting axes.
8006 <K>
8010 G02/03 Error This sets the tolerance for the radial error at the end point 0 to 0.100 (mm)
of the circular command.
8011 Chamfer value This sets the chamfering distance of the thread area in the 0 to 127 (0.1 lead)
thread cutting cycle (G76, G78).
8012 Chamfer angle This sets the chamfering angle of the thread area in the 0 to 89 (°)
thread cutting cycle (G76, G78).
Angle
Chamfering amount
8013 G71 Minimum This sets the remainder as the cut amount at the end of 0 to 99.999 (mm)
thick the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72).
But the cycle is not undertaken when this is less than the
value set by the parameter.
8014 G71 Delta-D The value (d) commanded by D is used as the reference 0 to 99.999 (mm)
for the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72) cut amount, and d –
∆d, d, d + ∆d are repeated. Cut change amount ∆d is set.
8015 G71 Pull up This sets the amount of retraction when a return is made 0 to 99.999 (mm)
to the cutting start point in the rough cutting cycle (G71,
G72).
II - 7
3. Setup Parameter
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
8016 G71 Thick This sets the cut amount in the rough cutting cycle (G71, 0 to 99.999 (mm)
G72).
Start
G71
d (Cut amount)
8017 G74 Retract This sets the chamfering amount (retraction) in the cut-off 0 to 99.999 (mm)
cycle (G74, G75).
G75
G74
Retraction
Retraction
8018 G76 Finishing This sets the final cut amount in the compound thread 0 to 99.999 (mm)
cutting cycle (G76).
Final cut amount
8019 G76 Minimum The minimum cut amount is used for cutting when the 0 to 99.999 (mm)
thick value is less than the minimum cut amount with constant
cutting at the cut amount in the compound thread cutting
cycle (G76).
G code types 1 and 2 apply for the above G code.
8020 G76 TIMES This sets the times the final cut amount (G76 Finishing) is 0 to 99 (rev)
divided in the compound thread cutting cycle (G76).
8021 G76 Angle This sets the angle of the tool nose (thread angle) for the 0 to 99 (°)
G76 command.
8022 G71 Pocket This sets the pocket machining in the rough cutting cycle 0: Pocket machining
(G71, G72) finish program when there is a cavity (pocket). OFF
1: Pocket machining
ON
8023 G73 CUT X This sets the X-axis cutting allowance in the formed rough 0 to 99.999 (mm)
cutting cycle (G73).
8024 G73 CUT Z This sets the Z-axis cutting allowance for G73. 0 to 99.999 (mm)
8025 G73 Times This sets the number of G73 cutting passes. 0 to 99999 (rev)
II - 8
3. Setup Parameter
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
8026 G83 Retract With the second and subsequent cutting passes in the 0 to 99.999 (mm)
deep hole drilling cycle (G83). This moves the tool by rapid
traverse from the position machined immediately before by
the amount equivalent to the setting, and then establishes
cutting feed.
8027
to
8030
8031 Tool wear max This sets the maximum value check data in the input data 0 to 99.999 (mm)
when the tool wear data is set.
8032 Tool wear inc max This sets the maximum value check data in the input data 0 to 99.999 (mm)
when the tool wear data is added.
(Note)When the setting is "0", the maximum value check is
not performed.
8033 Auto TLM speed [Automatic tool length measurement] This sets the feedrate for 1 to 60000 (mm/min)
Deceleration automatic tool length
start point Start point
measurement.
8034 Auto TLM zone r This sets the distance 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
from the measurement
Measuring point to the deceleration
speed start point.
r measurement
8035 Auto TLM zone d point This sets the area of the 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
d
point where the tool
should stop.
d
8051 Constant speed This sets the speed constant in the program check 1 to 60000
operation function.
8052 Interval This sets the frame feed time (from start up to pause) in 0 to 9.9 (s)
the frame feed operation function.
II - 9
3. Setup Parameter
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
8053 Control These are the parameters that select machine functions. 00 to FF
(PR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (hexadecimal)
MNF MRA VDEG THS SGC THU LTC
bit0: LTC (Linear type rotation axis function)

0: Invalid
1: Valid
This parameter is, however, valid when the
Basic common parameter 2 "1328 sp_2 bit7" is
set to 0 (common to systems).
bit1: THU (High-precision thread cutting)

0: Invalid (normal thread cutting)
1: Valid
This is effective when the thread cutting is valid
(chamfering is invalid) during thread cutting
fixed cycle (G78) or compound thread
cutting fixed cycle (G76).
bit2: SGC
Select whether to change the servo gain of the related
axis when the C axis is selected for the Spindle/C axis
function.
0: Do not change the position loop gain.
1: Change the position loop gain.
bit3: THS (continuous thread cutting blocks pre-reading)

Select whether to execute the block pre-reading when
continuous thread cutting is executed.
0: Continuous thread cutting block pre-reading is
invalid.
1: Continuous thread cutting block pre-reading is
valid.
bit4, 5: VDEG (angle between vectors)

Set the angle between vectors for canceling the
automatic insertion block during the nose R
compensation mode.
If the angle between vectors is set to 0° (VDEG="00"),
the automatic insertion block will be validated.
Normally, set this to "00".
VDEG
Angle between vectors
Bit5 Bit4
0 0 0°
0 1 2°
1 0 4°
1 1 8°
(Continued on the next page.)
II - 10
3. Setup Parameter
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
bit6：MRA
Select the operation when mirror image for facing tool
posts mode is changed and coordinate system setting
command is carried out for the axis in which tool
compensation is incomplete.
0 : Alarm occurs
1 : Operate
bit7 : MNF (Machine diagnosis function invalid)

Select whether to execute the machine diagnosis
function.
0：Machine diagnosis function is valid.
1：Machine diagnosis function is invalid.
8055 Scrn saver Not used. 0

time-out
8056 Intrf byps time-out This sets the time from axis stop to the time an 0 to 255 (s)
interference alarm is output when the interfering object
axis movement stops during interference bypass
execution.
The interference alarm will not be output when the setting
value is "0".
8057 Corner check If the angle between blocks (inner angle) in automatic 0 to 180 (°)
angle error detect is less than the set value, this judges a corner,
and controls the start timing of the next block.
N002
θ
N001
8058 Corner check After the block being executed has begun decelerating, 0 to 99.999 (mm)
width this begins the next block if the position error amount of
the command end point and the machine position is less
than the set value.
8059 Angle (G1 -> G0) Not used. 0 to 180 (°)
II - 11
3. Setup Parameter
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
8060 G140 time out This sets the time from the axis exchangeable state to the 255 (No timeout)
timeout (error occurrence). 0 to 254 (s)
255 : Timeout is not checked.
0 to 254 : Time to timeout (s)
8061 G182 time out This sets the time-out time for G182 command. 0 to 255 (s)
When G182 is commanded, NC waits for G181 command
having the same identification No. After the time set in this
parameter has elapsed, operation error (M01 1201)
occurs.
When "0" is set, there is no limit to waiting time.
8062 G76/G78 This sets the in-position check width in a G0-G0 block 0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
inposition deceleration check during thread cutting cycle (G76, G78). 0.0000 to 9.9999
When setting value is "0" or there is no programmable (inch)
in-position check function option, normal deceleration
check method is applied.
8084 LCD Contrast This sets the contrast adjustment value for the LCD. 0 to 15
0 8 15 (Default value: 8)
(Dark) (Bright)
(Note) The LCD contrast adjustment value is not backed

up on the NC side SRAM.
II - 12
III Machine Parameters
1. Basic Specifications Parameters
1.1 Base Axis Parameters

(Note) On the screen, the parameter which needs the NC power to be turned OFF displays "asterisk (*)" to
the end of the parameter name.
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1001 axname Name of axis Define correspondence between axis number and X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B,
name. C, etc., axis address
1002 incax Incremental Define axis name when incremental value commands
command axis are used.
name Valid when "ABS /INC address" is ON.
1003 cunit Command unit Set the minimum unit of the movement amount to be 1 0.1µm
programmed for each axis. 10 1µm
100 10µm
1000 100µm
10000 1mm
1004 sp_ax Spindle Define the spindle motor as the NC control axis. 0: Spindle control
(PR) interpolation Spindle motor: Spindle/C-axis control 1: Spindle and NC
Or, define the NC axis motor as the spindle. control axis
2: The NC axis motor
is used as the
spindle.
1005 iout Inch output Define output unit as metric unit or inch unit. 0: mm
(PR) "1" is set when inch units are used for the detector 1: inch
system at the machine side (ball screw and detector).
1006 rot Rotation axis Define whether axis is linear or rotation. 0: Linear axis
(PR) 1: Rotation axis
1007 ccw Motor ccw Define direction of motor rotation with forward 0: cw
(PR) direction command. 1: ccw
1008 svof Error Define whether error during servo OFF is to be 0: Error not corrected
(PR) correction corrected or not. 1: Error corrected
1009 dia Diameter Give the diameter command. 0: Radius value
command command
1: Diameter value
command
III - 1
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1010 polar Control axis Set the system 1 axis to "0", and set the polarity of The polarity with the
(PR) relative other system parallel axes in respect to the system 1 system 1 parallel axis
polarity setting axis. is:
When the parallel axes used for system 1 do not 0: Positive
exist, set with consideration for the basic machine 1: Negative
coordinate zero point setting values and polarity.
1011 abson Absolute With relative Define whether the soft limit is to be Soft limit while
(PR) position position made valid or not after the power is reference point return
detection detection turned ON until the completion of the in incomplete state is:
system reference point return. 0: Invalid
1: Valid
With absolute Define whether absolute position 0: Absolute position
position detection is to be executed or not with detection invalid
detection absolute position detection system. 1: Dog-type absolute
system position detection
system
2: Dog-less type
absolute position
detection system
1012 intabs Manual ABS Define whether absolute value data is to be updated 0: No absolute values
updating or not during automatic handle interrupt. updated
1: Absolute values
updated
1013 axname 2nd axis name Define the axis name for identifying the axis from all Set axis address such
2 systems. as X1, Z1 or C1 in 2
characters.
1014 cross_$ Cross axis Set system to be used as cross axis. 00 to FF
designation
$8 $7 $6 $5 $4 $3 $2 $1
(Example) "03" is the setting when this is used with

systems 1 and 2.
1015 axoff Not used. Set to "0". 0
III - 2
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1016 mcp_no MCP number Define the MCP channel No. and its axis No. in four MDS-D/DH:
(PR) digits. 1001 to 100F
● MDS-D/DH connection c00x 2001 to 200F
c = channel setting (1 to 3), 3001 to 300F
x = axis No. setting (1 to F)
Intelligent servo:
● Intelligent servo connection 0c0x
0101 to 0107
c = channel setting (1 to 2),
x = axis No. setting (1 to 7) 0201 to 0207
1017 regltrq Constant Set to validate the constant torque control function 1: Valid
torque control and constant torque control droop cancel function. 0: Invalid
When "invalid" is set, constant torque control function
and constant torque control droop cancel are not
executed if control request signal is set to R resister.
(Note) This setting is valid only when "#1360
sp_7/bit4 control method "2" " is selected.
1018 proptrq Proportional Set to validate the proportional torque pressing 1: Valid
torque control function. When "invalid" is set, constant 0: Invalid
pressing torque control function and constant torque control
control droop cancel are not executed if control request
signal is set to R register.
(Note) This setting is valid only when "#1360
sp_7/bit5 control method "2" " is selected.
1019 PLCdev Axis device Set the axis device assignment No. for PLC I/F. 0 : No assignment
assignment 1 to 32 : Axis device
(PR) _no
No. assignment No.
III - 3
1.2 Base System Parameters
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1101 Mfig M number Number: Set number which can be commanded in 1 to 4
1102 Mbin M binary same block. Data type
Binary: (-1, 0, 1)
1103 Sfig S number 1 to 6
Data type Output data
1104 Sbin S binary Data type
0 BCD (-1, 0, 1)
1105 Tfig T number 1
1 Binary (no sign)
1106 Tbin T binary Data type
-1 Binary (with sign) (-1, 0, 1)
1107 M2fig 2nd 1
miscellaneous "Sfig" sets not the number of same blocks but the
command number of spindles.
number
1108 M2bin 2nd Data type
miscellaneous (-1, 0, 1)
code binary
1109 M2name 2nd Set address used as 2nd miscellaneous function. A, B, C
miscellaneous Select from among A, B, C codes not used for
code movement control axis.
1110 skip_F G31 skip rate Set feedrate when F command is not contained in 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
program when G31 or G160 command has been
issued.
1111 skip_C G31 skip The skip condition setting will skip to the next block Skip condition: 0 to 7
condition during execution of the G31 command depending Set- PLC interface input signal
on which skip signal has been input. ting 3 2 Skip 1
0 x x x
For instance, when "7" has been set for the skip 1 x x o
condition and any of skip 1 to 3 is input, it skips. 2 x o x
3 x o o
(Equivalent to G31) 4 o x x
5 o x o
6 o o x
7 o o o
1112 extdcc External Upper limit of feedrate when external deceleration 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
deceleration signal is valid.
speed
1113 tapovr Not used. Set to "0". 0
1114 thr_SF Thread cutting Set cutting speed for (chamfering) invalid with 0 to 99999999
speed thread cutting cycle. (0.001mm/rev)
0: Cutting feed clamp
speed
1115 tap_tl Not used. Set to "0". 0
III - 4
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1116 dwlskp G04 skip This sets which skip signal should be input to skip Skip condition: 0 to 7
condition to the next block during executing G04 command. Set- PLC interface input signa
ting 3 2 Skip 1
For instance, when "7" has been set for the skip 0 x x x
condition and any of skip 1 to 3 is input, it skips. 1 x x o
2 x o x
(Equivalent to G31) 3 x o o
4 o x x
5 o x o
6 o o x
7 o o o
1117 G96_ax Constant Set which axis is to exercise constant surface 0: P command invalid
surface speed speed control. This control is exercised by the (fixed at 1st axis)
axis designated axis when the axis for such control has 1: 1st axis
been designated. 2: 2nd axis
3: 3rd axis
1118 clmp_M Clamp M code Set M code for C-axis clamping in hole drilling 0 to 99999999
cycle.
1119 clmp_D Dwell after Set dwell time after outputting M code for C-axis 0.000 to 99999.999 (s)
unclamp M unclamping in hole drilling cycle.
1120 origin Origin zero Not used. Set to "0". 0
prohibited
1121 tlmsens Not used. Set to "0". 0
1122 mirofs Double turret Set distance between tools (between tool noses) 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
distance for double turret.
1123 TmirS1 Turret Selects the turret for T-command double turret 0 to FFFFFFFF
selection for mirror image corresponding to Tool No.1 to 32.
T-command
double turret
1124 TmirS2 Turret Selects the turret for T-command double turret 0 to FFFFFFFF
selection for mirror image corresponding to Tool No.33 to 64.
T-command
double turret
1125 mill_ax Milling axis Set rotation axis number providing milling 0 to 4
number interpolation.
1126 mill_C Milling axis Select the hypothetical axis name for milling. 0: Y
name 1: Rotation axis name
1127
to
1128
1129 SBS_no Not used. Set to "0". 0
1130 SBS_pro Not used. Set to "0". 0
1131 Sselect Initial spindle Select the initial status after power has been turned 0: G43
control ON. 1: G44
selection 0: Spindle control mode (G43) ON
1: 2nd spindle control mode (G44) ON
1132
III - 5
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
adr_abs Command Set the command address in the arbitrary axis Axis address X, Y, Z,
1133 [1] address change command in that system. U, V, W, A, B, C, etc.
1134 [2] (Note 1) Do not set the same name in adr_abs[1]
1135 [3] to adr_abs[8].
1136 [4]
1137 [5] (Note 2) When the arbitrary axis change function is
1138 [6] not used, this setting is invalid.
1139 [7]
1140 [8]
adr_inc Incremental Set the incremental command address for each Axis address X, Y, Z,
1141 [1] command command address used in the arbitrary axis U, V, W, A, B, C, etc.
1142 [2] address change command.
1143 [3]
1144 [4] Use only when the control parameter "#8106
1145 [5] ABS/INC Addr." is ON.
1146 [6] (Note 1) Do not set the same name in adr_inc[1] to
1147 [7] adr_inc[8].
1148 [8]
(Note 2) When the absolute command address and
incremental command address have the
same name, the absolute command
address will have the priority.
(Note 3) When the arbitrary axis change function is
not used, this setting is invalid.
1149 real_I Machine When there is a multi-part system, set the axis X1, Z1, C1, etc. axis
plane_I name corresponding to the part system common address set in two or
1150 real_J _J plane configuration axis direction, using the less characters in the
1151 real_K _K two-character axis name set in Base axis parameter axname2.
parameter "#1013 axname2".
1152 rlIJrev I-J plane In a multi-part system, when the relation of each I, -359.999 to 359.999
(PR) rotation angle J, and K axis between the part systems is not (°)
1153 rlKIrev K-I plane parallel, set the angle per each plane so that the
(PR) rotation angle relation of those axes is parallel.
1154 rlJKrev J-K plane The plane rotation angle can be set only one plane
(PR) rotation angle by a part system. If two or more planes are set, this
setting is invalid. (The same as "0" is set to the 3
parameters.)
Basic machine Basic machine
coordinate I axis coordinate I axis
+ Rotation angle - Rotation angle
command direction command direction
+ +
Basic Basic
- + machine + - machine
coordinate coordinate
J axis J axis
- +
Basic machine Basic machine

coordinate I axis coordinate I axis
- Rotation angle + Rotation angle
+ +
Basic Basic
- + machine + - machine
J axis J axis
+ -
III - 6
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1171 imag_ax Hypothetical Set the hypothetical coordinate target axis. X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y1,
(PR) [1] coordinate Set the axis name in the part system. Z2, etc. axis address
target axis set in two or less
address 1 characters in the
1172 imag_ax Hypothetical parameter axname2.
(PR) [2] coordinate
target axis
address 2
1173 imgrev Hypothetical Set the rotation angle between the basic machine -359.999 to 359.999
coordinate coordinate system and the hypothetical machine (°)
target axis coordinate system when the stored stroke limit for
stored stroke the hypothetical coordinate target axis is set. When 0.000 (°) is set,
limit hypothetical
The setting direction in the basic machine coordinate target axis
coordinate coordinate system for each polarity is shown
rotation angle stored stroke limit is
below. invalid.
Actual axis X Actual axis X

machine coordinate machine coordinate
+ Rotation angel - Rotation angel
+ +
Actual axis Actual axis
- + Y machine + - Y machine
- +
Actual axis X Actual axis X

machine coordinate machine coordinate
- Rotation angel + Rotation angel
+ +
Actual axis Actual axis
- + Y machine + - Y machine
+ -
1174 imgax1 Hypothetical Set the stored stroke limit for imag_ax[1] on ±99999.999 (mm)
OT- coordinate rotation coordinate system that is set by ingrev. The setting value is
target axis 1 radial value fixed.
stored stroke When the same value
1175 imgax1 limit is set to 1174 and
OT+
1175 (other than 0),
this function is invalid.
1176 imgax2 Hypothetical Set the stored stroke limit for imag_ax[2] on ±99999.999 (mm)
OT- coordinate rotation coordinate system that is set by ingrev. The setting value is
stored stroke When the same value
1177 imgax2 limit is set to 1176 and
OT+
1177 (other than 0),
III - 7
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1178 imgax1 Hypothetical Set the 2nd block stored stroke limit for imag_ax[1] ±99999.999 (mm)
OT2- coordinate on rotation coordinate system that is set by ingrev. The setting value is
2nd block When the same value
1179 imgax1 stored stroke is set to 1178 and
OT2+ limit 1179 (other than 0),
1180 imgax2 Hypothetical Set the 2nd block stored stroke limit for imag_ax[2] ±99999.999(mm)
OT2- coordinate on rotation coordinate system that is set by ingrev. The setting value is
2nd block When the same value
1181 imgax2 stored stroke is set to 1180 and
OT2+ limit 1181 (other than 0),
1182 SRN_MST During the Set whether miscellaneous function (M, T, 2nd 0 : Do not output
restart mode miscellaneous function) is output or not at 1 : Output
miscellaneous automatic operation (machine lock high-speed
function operation) during the program restart mode.
output
1183 bt_axname Not used. Set to "0". 0
1184 bt_base Not used. Set to "0". 0
1185 bt_lx Not used. Set to "0". 0
1186 bt_lz Not used. Set to "0". 0
1187 bt_polar Not used. Set to "0". 0
1188 bt_plane Not used. Set to "0". 0
1189 SP1ini Initial 1st Set the spindle name (Sname) selected when G43 0 to 9
(PR) spindle is commanded. Set the spindle name.
selection When the setting value is other than 1st to 6th
spindle name or "0", 1st spindle is the spindle to
be controlled.
This parameter is valid when "#1359 SP2name" is
set to "0".
1190 SP2ini Initial 2nd Set the spindle name (Sname) selected when G44 0 to 9
(PR) spindle is commanded. Set the spindle name.
selection When the setting value is other than 1st to 6th
spindle name or "0", 2nd spindle is the spindle to
be controlled.
This parameter is valid when "#1359 SP2name" is
set to "0".
III - 8
1.3 Base Common Parameters
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1301 Mmac M call macro Set whether macro call based on M command is to 0: Invalid
(PR) be executed or not when user macro specifications 1: Valid
are valid.
1302 Smac S call macro Set whether macro call based on S command is to 0: Invalid
are valid.
1303 Tmac T call macro Set whether macro call based on T command is to 0: Invalid
are valid.
1304 M2mac 2nd Set whether macro call is to be executed or not 0: Invalid
(PR) miscellaneous with 2nd miscellaneous command when user 1: Valid
code call macro specifications are valid.
macro
1305 M_inch Constant inch Select unit used for machine parameter data. 0: mm
(PR) input 1: inch
1306 fix_P Fixed cycle Not used. Set to "0". 0
editing
(Not used.)
1307 edlk_C Program lock Validate program lock for machining programs with 0: Invalid
C label numbers 9000 through 9999. 1: Valid
1308 Pinc Machine error Designate incremental or absolute amount system 0: Absolute amount
(PR) compensation for machine error compensation data setting. system
amount 1: Incremental amount
incremental system
amount
system
1309 DPRINT Arrangement Not used. Set to "0". 0
of digit for
DPRINT
(Not used.)
1310 ofsfix Tool Selects whether the #No. should be counted up by 0: Counted up
compensation pressing [INPUT] key or not when tool 1: Not counted up
No. fixed compensation is set .
1311 Tmiron T command Selects whether the opposite turret minor image by 0: Invalid
opposite turret T command is valid or not. 1: Valid
mirror image
selection
1312 G96_G0 Rapid traverse Select whether to calculate at all times constant 0: Calculation at all
control during surface speed for rapid traverse command or to times
constant calculate surface speed at end point of block. 1: Calculation at end
surface speed point
III - 9
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1313 radius Incremental Select the diameter/radius value processing for 0: Processing as
command of incremental value command of the diametrical diameter values
diametrical designation axis (dia (1) ). 1: Processing as
designation radius values
axis
1314 Tldigt Tool The high-order digit of the T code indicates the tool 0: Low-order 2-digits
compensation number and the low-order digit indicates the tool for T code
number 1-digit compensation number. Select whether the number 1: Low-order 1-digit for
command of digits designation is to be the two high-order and T code
low-order digits or the three high-order and one
low-order digit.
1315 Tlno. Tool length Select whether High-order 2 or 3 digits of T code
offset number tool length offset 0: ... Tool number
is to be applied Low-order 2 or 1 digit of T code
by high-order or ... Tool length number/Tool wear number
low-order digits High-order 2 or 3 digits of T code
of T code. ... Tool number/Tool length number
1:
Low-order 2 or 1 digit of T code
... Tool wear number
1316 Treset Tool offset This selects whether the tool length offset and wear 0: Cleared
amount cancel offset vectors are to be cleared by resetting. 1: Not cleared
1317 Tmove Tool Select whether tool compensation is to be 0: Applied even for
compensation performed when a tool without a movement blocks without
operation command is assigned. movement
commands
1: Applied only for
blocks without
movement
commands
1318 rstint Reset initialize Define whether modals are to be initialized or not 0: No reset initialize
(PR) by reset button. 1: Reset initialize
1319 I_abs Manual ABS Define by means of parameter using manual ABS 0: Based on manual
(PR) parameter switch whether absolute data is to be updated or ABS switch
not during manual, handle and automatic handle 1: Based on parameter
interrupt.
1320 H_acdc Handle time Define whether time constant applying for handle 0: Handle feed time
(PR) constant 0 feed is to be G01 time constant or time constant of constant G01
0. 1: Handle feed time
constant 0
1321 G30SL G30 soft limit Define whether soft limit is to be valid or not with 0: Soft limit valid with
(PR) invalid G30 reference point return. G30
1: Soft limit invalid with
G30
1322 inpos In-position Define whether command deceleration check or 0: Command
(PR) check valid in-position check will apply for deceleration check. deceleration check
If in-position check is selected, it checks by method
in-position width of servo parameter. 1: In-position check
method
III - 10
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1323 tlm Manual tool Not used. Set to "0". 0
length
measuring
system
(Not used.)
1324 lang Display Change the language to be displayed on the 0: English
language screen. 1: Japanese
changeover
1325 mirr_A Opposite turret Define whether value applying for tool of opposite 0,1
tool length turret is to be set as is or whether value applying
setting system for opposite turret tool in same direction at
selection reference turret tool is to be set.
0: Value of opposite turret tool as it is
1: Value for tool on opposite turret which is
value for same direction as tool of reference
turret
1327 sp_1 This is the parameter that selects the function. 00 to FF (HEX)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
bit0: G1 in-position check valid

0: Command deceleration check method
1: In-position check method
Define the deceleration check when in the
cutting feed mode. During in-position check, it
checks by the in-position width of the servo
parameter.
bit1: Rapid traverse constant inclination
acceleration/deceleration valid
0: Rapid traverse time constant
acceleration/deceleration system
1: Rapid traverse constant inclination
acceleration/deceleration system
Define the acceleration/deceleration system for
the rapid traverse mode. Valid only in the linear
acceleration/deceleration mode.
bit2: G1 in-position check type
0: In-position check type A
1: In-position check type B
Used to select the in-position check system for
the G1 mode.
bit3: G0 in-position check type
0: In-position check type A
1: In-position check type B
Used to select the in-position check system for
the G0 mode.
III - 11
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
bit4 : Tool command control
0: It always makes hand-shake (TF-FIN
output) between NC and PLC when Tool
command is assigned.
1: It makes hand-shake between NC and PLC
only if a command of Tool No. exists in the
Tool command.
(Note) Command of Tool No.
#1314 T1digit: 0→The No. is more than high-order
3 digits of T-code value.
1→The No. is more than high-order
2 digits of T-code value.
bit5: Diameter command for manual random feed:
0: Moves regarding as a data fixed in radius
value.
1: Moves following the machine parameter
diameter/radius command.
bit6: Tool life management method
0: Tool life management
(Tool life management Spare tool charge)
1: Tool life management
(Group No. designation method
Spare tool change)
Bit7: Axis position monitor function validity
0: Do not monitor axis position (invalid)
1: Monitor axis position (valid)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
bit2: Automatic change of spindle speed for thread

cutting
0: Invalid (As commanded rotation)
1: Valid
This is available during "Thread cutting
fixed cycle (G78)" or "Compound thread
cutting fixed cycle (G76)"
bit3: Spindle override during thread cutting
0: Spindle override invalid during thread cutting
(fixed to 100%)
1: Spindle override valid during thread cutting
bit6: Handle input pulse changeover
0: MITSUBISHI standard handle pulse
1: Handle 400 pulse (4 multiplied)
bit7: Change of rotation axis (liner type/rotation
type)
0: Common on system
(According to "#8053 Control" in the setup
parameter.)
1: Axis independent
(According to "#2030 spx_1" in the axis
specifications parameter.)
III - 12
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1329 sp_3 This parameter selects the function. 0000 to FFFF (HEX)
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
bit4: Axis position monitor C function

0: Do not monitor axis position (invalid)
1: Monitor axis position (valid)
bit6: Mirror image offset cancel
0: Hold
1: Cancel
• Select whether to cancel or hold the tool
offset when mirror image is canceled.
bit7: Manual speed clamp validity
0: The rapid traverse rate (#2001 rapid) is
used for the maximum speed during jog,
handle, incremental and manual zero point
return (high-speed). However, the PLC
device can be used to switch the maximum
speed to the manual feed clamp speed
(#2034 m_clamp).
1: The manual feed clamp speed (#2034
m_clamp) is used for the maximum speed
during jog, handle, incremental and manual
zero point return (high-speed).
bit8: T command digits judgment
0: Function invalid
1: Function valid
• When the T macro call is valid, whether to
call the T macro can be judged with the
number of T digits.
• If the tool length offset No. and wear offset
No. are individually commanded by
parameter setting, the wear offset No. can
be changed without changing the tool
length offset No.
III - 13
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
(Continued from the previous page.)
bit9: Wear offset amount hold
0: Function invalid
1: Function valid
• The tool length offset No. can be
commanded while the wear offset No. is
held with T∆∆97. (∆∆ is a random tool
length offset No.)
(Note) Each function can be used only
when the high-order two digits of
the T command are the tool length
offset No., and the low-order two
digits are the wear offset No.
bitA: Tool compensation validity at the arbitrary
superimposition control start/end
0: The tool compensation amount is not
included for coordinate system changeover
and movement to the start/end position in
arbitrary superimposition control start/end
command.
1: The tool compensation amount is included
for coordinate system changeover and
movement to start/end position in arbitrary
superimposition control start/end command.
bitB to bitD: Use prohibited. (Used by system)
bitE: G53 tool compensation amount temporary
cancel
0: Temporarily cancel
1: Do not temporarily cancel
bitF: Use prohibited. (Used by system)
1330 sp_4 Thread cutting delay time: 0 to 255
Set delay time for thread cutting while
high-precision thread cutting is valid (when
control parameter/bit1 is ON).
Setting this time long can make the length of
useful screw long. However, when the time is too
long, thread cutting may rotate at the same
height around the screw.
(Note) The value more than 255 can be set, but
it is valid the quotient when the set value
is divided by 256.
1331 sp_5 Error width of reach after auto-changing the spindle 0 to 100 (r/min)
speed:
If it is effective auto-changing the thread cutting
spindle speed (when sp_2/bit2 is ON) the thread
cutting starts when the difference becomes
smaller than this parameter value; the difference
between the spindle commanded speed after
auto-changing and the spindle axis actual speed.
(Note) The value more than 100 can be set, in
such a case, it clamps at 100, but the
display does not clamp.
III - 14
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
bit0: Subsystem start not possible alarm

0: When the subsystem start is not possible,
waits until start is possible.
1: When the subsystem start is not possible,
outputs an alarm.
bit1: Axis change not possible alarm
0: When the axis declared by the axis change
command is not a change status, waits until
change is possible.
1: Outputs an alarm when the axis declared by
the axis change command is not in a
change status.
bit2: When resetting, select Hold/Do not hold for
the spindle clamp speed setting value.
0: Clears the spindle clamp speed when reset.
1: Does not clear the spindle clamp speed
when reset.
bit3: Select the valid range for the spindle clamp
speed setting value.
0: Valid only during constant surface speed.
1: Valid for all spindle rotation commands.
bit4: Continuous B→A transfer prohibited
0: Continuous B→A transfer is possible.
1: Continuous B→A transfer is prohibited.
bit5: Compensation cancel after arbitrary axis
change
0: Compensation after arbitrary axis change
will not be canceled.
1: Compensation after arbitrary axis change
will be canceled.
bit6: Use prohibited. (Used by system)
1333 mstsyn Dwell/MST Select whether the override is valid or not on the 0: Override invalid
override dwell/MST. 1: Override valid
Valid/Invalid (Multiple system)
Select
1334 Tcom Offset This selects whether the tool offset and tool life 0: System by system
(PR) common to management are to apply in common to the 1: Common to systems
systems systems or apply on a system-by-system basis.
1335 syncch Move Select whether it makes axis moving command for 0: Invalid
command synchronous axis invalid or an alarm when the 1: Alarm
check with command is assigned during the control axis are
control axis synchronous.
synchronous
1336 dspax Current value Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR) simultaneous
display axis
(Not used.)
III - 15
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1337 crsman Manual This selects whether manual interrupt is to be valid 0: Invalid
(PR) interrupt or invalid for the axis which has been crossed by 1: Valid
during cross the cross machining command.
machining
1338 otsys Stop OT all Select whether all systems will stop or only the 0: System with error
(PR) systems system where the alarm occurred will stop when an stops
Valid/invalid H/W-OT, soft limit, or interference check alarm 1: All systems stop
select occurs.
(Note) The system where the alarm occurred
means the system that includes the
superimposition (synchronization) and
reference axis when the H/W-OT, soft limit,
interference check alarm occurred during
the superimposed/
synchronized/arbitrary superimposed axis
movement of the synchronous related axis.
1340 TGSmax Numbers of Not used. Set to "0". 0
sets position
control
variables
Numbers of
packs in a set
(Not used.)
1341 H1_pno No. 1 handle Determine the port to which the No. 1 handle to No. 0: Port 0
(PR) selection 3 handle will be connected. 1: Port 1
1342 H2_pno No. 2 handle 2: Port 2
(PR) selection
1343 H3_pno No. 3 handle
(PR) selection
1344 statio Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1345 size-i Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1346 size-o Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1347 length Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1348 b-rate Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1349 s-bit Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1350 parity Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1351 even Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1352 Tout-i Not used. Set to "0". 0
1353 Tout-o Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1354 siobus Not used. Set to "0". 0
1355 cmacdb Not used. Set to "0". 0
III - 16
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1356 GBtest G/B spindle Set the test mode to register the characteristics of 0: Normal
synchroniza- the reference spindle motor and the G/B spindle 1: Test mode
tion test mode motor in the NC.
When "1" is set in this parameter, the mode
changes to the G/B spindle synchronization test
mode.
After setting this parameter, turn ON the G/B
spindle synchronization signal, and forward or
reverse run the reference spindle to the maximum
speed, without passing the workpiece between the
reference spindle and the G/B spindle.
After the spindle rotation has stopped, always set
"0" in this parameter.
Execute this function when the relative position

error is large for the reference axis and the G/B
spindle during constant speed rotation.
1357 Cool_t Warning time Not used. Set to "0". 0
during cooling
(Not used.)
1358 SBSsys Subsystem Set the system to be used as the subsystem. 00 to FF
designation (HEX setting)
$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 $8
1359 SP2name 2nd spindle Set the spindle name (Sname) subject to 2nd 0 to 9
name spindle control.
If the following value is set, the spindle to be
controlled will be the 2nd spindle.
• Other than 2nd spindle to 6th spindle name
• 1st spindle name
• "0"
F E D C B A 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
bit0: C axis inch speed command method

changeover
0: To not to change the speed command
method for the rotation axis.
Initial
Mode Rotation axis speed
inch
G21 Command value
OFF
G20 Command value ∗ 25.4
G21 Command value / 25.4
ON
G20 Command value ∗ 10
III - 17
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1: To change the speed command method
Initial Rotation axis
Mode
inch speed
G21 Command value
OFF
G20 Command value
G21 Command value
ON
G20 Command value
bit1: Spindle-type servo Spindle C axis

Gain changeover selection during C axis
selection
0: Do not change gain
1: Change gain
Select whether to use the normal position loop

gain (SV003, SV004, SV057) or the C
axis/synchronous tap position loop gain
(SV003, SV004, SV058) when the Spindle/C
axis control is selected using spindle-type
servo.
bit2: Spindle-type servo

Gain changeover selection during
synchronous tapping
0: Do not change gain
1: Change gain
Select whether to use the normal position loop

gain (SV003, SV004, SV057) or the C
axis/synchronous tap position loop gain
(SV003, SV004, SV058) during synchronous
tap control using the spindle-type servo.
bit3: Spindle-type servomotor

Gear changeover function selection
0 : The gear will not be changed.
1 : The gear will be changed.
With spindle-type servomotor, select the
validity of the gear changeover operation by
PLC signal.
III - 18
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
bit4: Constant torque control method
0 : Control method 1 (Method to control only
one arbitrary axis)
1 : Control method 2 (Method to control all
axis)
(Note) If this parameter is changed, control
method of constant torque control droop
cancel function, also, is changed.
bit5: Proportional torque pressing control

0 : Control method 1 (Method to control only
one arbitrary axis)
1 : Control method 2 (Method to control all
axis)
bit6: The waiting-and-simultaneous ignored part

system setting validity
0 : The waiting-and-simultaneous ignored part
system setting is invalidated by PLC signal.
1 : The waiting-and-simultaneous ignored part
system setting is validated by PLC signal.
bit8: Constant surface speed control temporary

cancel validity
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
bitA: Use prohibited. (Used by system)
bitB: Restart point designation validity (PR)

0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
With program restart method, select the
validity of restart point designation function. If
the validity is changed, turn CNC power ON
again.
bitD: High-speed simple program check

miscellaneous function output
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
Select the validity of miscellaneous function
output during part system synchronized
machine lock mode.
The output miscellaneous function is only a
miscellaneous command that outputs
according to parameter (#1441 to #1444,
#1451 to #1458).
III - 19
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
F E D C B A 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
bit0 : Spindle/C axis C axis changeover type

0 : With turning the servo OFF signal (*SVFn)
ON/OFF, C axis is selected.
1 : With C axis control of machining program, C
axis is selected.
The option is required in order to validate
"bit0=1" changeover type.
If there is no option, "bit0=0" changeover type is
validated regardless of this parameter setting.
bit1 : Spindle/C axis after the power is turned ON

C axis control selection
0 : The C axis control mode is invalid
immediately after the power is turned ON.
1 : The C axis control mode is valid immediately
after the power is turned ON.
bit2 : Spindle/C axis control selection after reset

and start, after emergency stop is released
0 : The C axis control mode is invalid after reset
and start.
1 : The C axis control mode is valid after reset
starts if C axis control mode is valid when
reset starts.
1362 sunit Internal Select the validity of internal sub-micrometric. 0 : Internal

(PR) sub-micromet- sub-micrometric is
ric invalid
1 : Internal
sub-micrometric is
valid
1365 Not used. Set to "0". 0
:
1376
III - 20
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1377 hspro High-speed Select the high-speed program analysis function. 00 to FF (Hex)
program 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
analysis
function
selection
bit0 : Machine tool builder macro run mode
0 : EIA EIA program run mode
1 : Execution type data run mode
1378 TAPovr Max. override Set the override command maximum value at tap 0 to 999 (%)
command at return. When setting value is "0", command
tap return maximum value "999" is applied.
1379 Emgcnt Emergency When safety observation is executed, set the time 0 to 60 (s)
stop contactor between when emergency stop state is applied and
shut-off time when the contactor of the drive section's main
power is shut off.
The contactor shut-off signal is output as soon as
all the axes are confirmed stopped; shutting off the
contactor may not take longer than the set time.
When there is no safety observation option and "0"
is set, the shut-off time is 30 (s).
1380 MC_dp1 Contactor When safety observation is executed, set the 0000 to 02FF (HEX)
weld detection remote I/O device No. (1st No.) to input the
device 1 contactor's auxiliary b contact signal used for the
contactor weld detection.
If "0" is set, weld detection is not executed.
So, X0 cannot be used for contactor weld detection
device.
1381 MC_dp2 Contactor When safety observation is executed, set the 0000 to 02FF (HEX)
weld detection remote I/O device No. (2nd No.) to input the
device 2 contactor's auxiliary b contact signal used for the
contactor weld detection.
If "0" is set, weld detection is not executed.
So, X0 cannot be used for contactor weld detection
device.
1382 AlarmHist Alarm history Concerning the alarm that disappears within 0 to 32767 (ms)
Cycle invalid time arbitrary time, if not keeping its record as alarm -1 : Do not record
history, the time is set by this parameter.
The alarm persisted more than a set time is
recorded as alarm history.
If "-1" is set, the alarm history is not recorded
regardless of alarm duration.
III - 21
The function is, to proceed to the next block without waiting for the completion signal from the PLC following
the output of the auxiliary command.
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1401 M_type Used to select the operations of the M commands. 0 to 1
0: Do not wait for the completion of registered M
codes, but wait for the completion of other M
codes.
1: Wait for the completion of registered M codes,
but do not wait for the completion of other M
codes.
1402 S_mode Used to select the completion system for S 0 to 1
commands.
0: Wait for the completion signal from the PLC.
1: Do not wait for the completion signal from the
PLC.
1403 T_mode Used to select the completion system for T 0 to 1
commands.
PLC.
1404 M2_mode Used to select the completion system for second 0 to 1
auxiliary commands.
PLC.
1411 M031-000 Used to register those M codes for which special 0 to FFFFFFFF
1412 M063-032 operations are necessary. (HEX)
1413 M095-064 Set the M code number so that it corresponds to
1414 M127-096 the bit number.
1415 M159-128 (Example) Registering M05
1416 M191-160 Register "00000020" in #1411.
1417 M223-192 Care is required when setting as the operations of
1418 M255-224 an M code change in accordance with the value in
"M_type".
Value of Operations of an resistered
M_type M code
Do not wait for completion
0
signal from PLC.
Wait for completion signal from
1
PLC.
III - 22
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1431 AUX Number of Set the number of auxiliary axes. 0 to 6
(PR) axis nos auxiliary axes • Number of axes connected "n" corresponds to
1st to n-th auxiliary axis. The names of
auxiliary axes are AUX1, AUX2...AUXn.
• Up to 6 axes are valid
• When the number of axes set is less than the
actual number of axes, a servo communication
error occurs and auxiliary axis control is not
possible.
• When "0" is set for the number of auxiliary axes,
the auxiliary axis function is invalid.
1441 M_type Select the output method of M code command 0 to 1
(SMLK) during the part system synchronization machine
lock.
0: M code registered in #1451 to #1458 is output
and M code not registered is not output.
Any M code after M256 is not output.
1: M code not registered in #1451 to #1458 is
output and M code registered is not output.
All the M codes after M256 are output.
1442 S_mode Select the output method of S code command 0 to 1
lock.
0: S code is not output
1: S code is output
1443 T_mode Select the output method of T code command 0 to 1
lock.
0: T code is not output
1: T code is output
1444 M2_mode Select the output method of 2nd miscellaneous 0 to 1
command during the part system synchronization
(SMLK)
machine lock.
0: 2nd miscellaneous command is not output
1: 2nd miscellaneous command is output
1451 M031-000 Register the M code to be output during the part 0 to FFFFFFFF
(SMLK) system synchronization machine lock.
(HEX)
Each bit of the setting value corresponds to the No.
1452 M063-032
of M code.
(SMLK)
(Example) When registering M05, set 00000020 in
1453 M095-064 #1451.
(SMLK) Note that the movement of the registered M code
1454 M127-096 varies depending on the value set in
(SMLK) M_type(SMLK).
1455 M159-128 (Note) M code after M256 is assumed to be set to
(SMLK) "00000000".
1456 M191-160
(SMLK)
1457 M223-192
(SMLK)
1458 M255-224
(SMLK)
III - 23
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1925 EtherNet Start of Start or stop the Ethernet communication function. 0/1
service 0: Stop
1: Start
1926 IP Global IP Set the main CPU's IP address. Set these parameters
address address Set the NC IP address looking from an external in accordance with
source. the network rules in
1927 Subnet Global Set the subnet mask for the global IP address. the machine
mask subnet mask connection
1928 Gateway Global Set the IP address for the global gateway. environment.
address gateway
1929 Port Port No. Set the port No. for the service function. 1 to 9999
number (Set 2000 when not
connected to the
Ethernet.)
1930 Host Not used. Set "0. 0. 0. 0.". 0. 0. 0. 0.
address
1931 Host Not used. Set "0". 0
number
1932 Not used. Set "0". 0
:
1933
1934 Local IP Local IP Set the display unit side IP address. Set these parameters
address address Set a private IP address conforming to RFC1918, in accordance with
which is different from the one set in LAN1 side the network settings
network. in the display unit
connection
environment.
Standard:
192.168.100.1
1935 Local Local Set the display unit side subnet mask. Set these parameters
Subnet Subnet in accordance with
mask mask the network settings
in the display unit
connection
environment.
Standard:
255.255.255.1
! CAUTION
! Always take security countermeasures when connecting to outside network.
III - 24
2. Axis Specification Parameters

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2001 rapid Rapid traverse Set rapid traverse rate for each axis; maximum 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
rate setting depends on machine system and so care is
required in this respect.
2002 clamp Cutting feed Define maximum cutting feedrate for each axis. 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
clamp speed
2003 smgst Acceleration/ Designate modes for acceleration/deceleration HEX setting
(PR) deceleration control;
mode F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0T3 0T2 0T1 C3 C1 LC R3 R1 LR
(Note) Always set blank bits to "0".
Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration type:

LR Linear acceleration, linear
deceleration
R1 Primary delay
R3 Exponential acceleration, linear
deceleration
bit0 to 3 =1 : Acceleration/deceleration by
software
Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration type:

LC Linear acceleration, linear
deceleration
C1 Primary delay
C3 Exponential acceleration, linear
deceleration
bit4 to 7 =1 : Acceleration/deceleration by
software
<Acceleration/deceleration pattern
combinations>
Primary delay
R1=1 (C1=1)
Linear-Linear
Command LR=1 (LC=1)
Step
LR=0 (LC=0)
Step
R1-R3=0
(C1-C3=0)
Values in parentheses are
for cutting feed.
Both linear acceleration and deceleration for rapid
traverse and cutting feed are not possible.
R1>R3 when R1 and R3 are both "1".
III - 25
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
<Stroke end stop type>
Type OT2 OT3

Linear deceleration 0 0
Position loop step stop 1 0
Speed loop step stop 0 1
Position loop step stop 1 1
0 Deceleration with G0t1

OT1
1 Deceleration with 2xGt01
Speed Stroke end signal
Time
G0t1 G0t1 2 x G0t1 (OT1=1)

(OT1=0)
OT1 is valid when stop type is "linear deceleration"

and acceleration/deceleration mode is "exponential
acceleration/linear deceleration".
(It is also valid with dog-type zero point return.)
2004 G0tL G0 time Set time constant for linear control with rapid 1 to 1500 (ms)
constant traverse acceleration/deceleration; valid when Acceleration or
(linear) linear acceleration/linear deceleration rapid deceleration by
traverse (LR) has been selected in software:
acceleration/deceleration mode "#2003 smgst" 1 to 750 (ms)
When acceleration or deceleration by software is
selected, time constant for acceleration or
deceleration by software is applied.
Speed
Time
G0tL G0tL
III - 26
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2005 G0t1 G0 time Set primary delay time constant with rapid traverse 1 to 5000 (ms)
constant acceleration/deceleration; valid when primary delay Acceleration or
(primary rapid traverse (R1) and exponential deceleration by
delay) acceleration/linear deceleration rapid traverse (R3) software:
have been selected in acceleration/deceleration 1 to 750 (ms)
mode "#2003 smgst".
selected, acceleration or deceleration adjustment
time constant for acceleration or deceleration by
software is applied.
<Primary delay rapid traverse>

Speed
Time
G0t1 G0t1
2006 G0t2 Not used. Set to "0". 0

2007 G1tL G1 time Set time constant for linear control with cutting feed 1 to 1500 (ms)
constant acceleration/deceleration; valid when linear Acceleration or
(linear) acceleration/linear deceleration cutting feed has deceleration by
been selected in acceleration/ software:
deceleration mode "#2003 smgst". 1 to 750 (ms)
selected, time constant for acceleration or
deceleration by software is applied.
Speed
Time
G1tL G1tL
III - 27
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2008 G1t1 G1 time Set primary delay time constant with cutting feed 1 to 5000 (ms)
constant acceleration/deceleration; valid when primary delay Acceleration or
(primary cutting feed (C1) and exponen-tial deceleration by
delay) acceleration/linear deceleration cutting feed (C3) software:
have been selected in acceleration/ 1 to 750 (ms)
deceleration mode "#2003 smgst".
selected, acceleration or deceleration adjustment
time constant for acceleration or deceleration by
software is applied.
<Primary delay cutting feed>
Speed
Time
G1t1 G1t1
2009 G1t2 Not used. Set to "0". 0

2010 OTtm OT time When the speed loop step stop is selected for the 1 to 32767 (ms)
Stroke end stop type, it keeps the speed loop state
during the time set.
Set the same or near value as the G0 time
constant.
2011 G0back G0 backlash Set backlash compensation amount with -9999 to 9999
movement command in rapid traverse mode or with (command unit/2)
reverse direction in manual mode.
2012 G1back G1 backlash Set backlash compensation amount with reverse -9999 to 9999
direction when movement command has been (command unit/2)
issued in cutting feed mode.
2013 OT- Soft limit - These set soft limit area with zero point of basic ±99999.999 (mm)
machine coordinate system as reference point.
Basic mechanical coordinates OT+ (Z)

OT- (X) M
2014 OT+ Soft limit +
OT+ (X)
OT- (Z)
Movable area
III - 28
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2015 tlml- Manual tool Not used. Set to "0". 0
length
measurement
II
- direction
sensor
2016 tlml+ Manual tool Not used. Set to "0". 0
length
measurement
II
+ direction
sensor
2017 pG0t G0 time This sets the time constant for rapid traverse Linear acceleration or
constant acceleration/deceleration during 2-axis deceleration:
during superimposition control. 1 to 1500(ms)
superimposi- The time constant for acceleration or deceleration Acceleration or
tion by software at 2-axis superimposition control is deceleration by
validated when acceleration or deceleration by software:
software is selected in acceleration or deceleration 1 to 750(ms)
mode "#2003 smgst". Primary delay
acceleration or
deceleration:
1 to 5000(ms)
2018 pG1t G1 time This sets the time constant for cutting feed Linear acceleration or
during superimposition control. 1 to 1500(ms)
acceleration or
deceleration:
1 to 5000(ms)
2020 tskip_T Torque skip Set the time that torque skip condition is 0 to 32767 (ms)
non-sensitive invalidated. (When G160 is commanded.)
band This parameter is effective when illegal skips occur
by current at acceleration.
III - 29
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2021 plrap0 Rapid traverse In the superimpose command, this sets the rapid 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
rate 0 during traverse rate with movement in the same direction
superimposi- as another axis which is moving by rapid traverse.
tion
2022 plrap1 Rapid traverse In the superimpose command, this sets the rapid 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
rate 1 during traverse rate with movement in the same direction
superimposi- as another axis which is moving by cutting feed.
tion
2023 plclmp Cutting feed In the superimpose command, this sets the cutting 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
clamp speed feed clamp speed with movement in the same
direction as another axis which is moving by cutting
feed.
2024 offset Tool offset Carry out tool compensation for the IJK plane's 0: Tool compensation
select axis. invalid
When arbitrary axis exchange is valid, tool 1: Tool compensation
compensation is validated for the IJK plane's valid
address tool regardless of this parameter setting.
2025 G0fwdg G0 feed Set the feed forward gain value for rapid traverse 0 to 200 (%)
forward gain mode (G0) in automatic operations. Standard value:
70 (%)
2026 fwd_g G1 feed Set feed forward gain for cutting feed mode (G1, 0 to 200 (%)
forward gain G2, G3) in automatic operation. Standard value:
70 (%)
2027 vir_ax Hypothetical Set whether the axis is treated as hypothetical axis 0: Not treated as
axis or not. hypothetical axis
1: Treated as
hypothetical axis
2028 ref- Reference Assign the -side and +side with the first reference 0 to 179.999 (mm)
point point as a standard point.
approach - The reference point approach signal is output
2029 ref+ Reference within the setting range for each of positive or
point negative side with the first reference point as a
approach + standard point.
Reference point approach signal
ref- ref+
- +
1st reference point
III - 30
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2030 spx_1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 00 to FF (HEX)
RSC LTC
bit0: LTC (Linear type rotation axis function)

(PR)
0: Invalid
1: Valid
This parameter is, however, effective when
"#1328 sp_2 bit7" has been set
to 1 (axis independent).
bit1 : RSC (Rotation axis shortcut validity)

0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
bit4 : Lost motion compensation validity at only

synchronous tap
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
By combining the lost motion compensation type
(SV027 lmc1, lmc2) , the operation is switched as
follows.
SV027 spx_1
Operation
(lmc1,lmc2) (bit4)
Lost motion Invalid Always lost motion
compensation compensation is invalid
invalid Valid Always lost motion
compensation is valid
Lost motion Invalid Lost motion
compensation compensation is valid
Type 1 or type Valid at only synchronous
2 tap
bit2, bit3, bit5 to bit7: Not used. Normally set to 0.

2031 spx_2 Not used. Set to "0". 00
2032 spx_3 Not used. Set to "0". 0000
III - 31
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2033 baseps Basic machine Set each axis position of the basic machine ±99999.999 (mm)
coordinate coordinate zero point having the random reference
zero point point M on the machine as a reference point.
relative
distance M
System 1 basic machine

coordinate zero point
System 2 basic machine

coordinate zero point
Align the machine zero point position direction of all

systems with the direction of the first system
machine coordinate system direction.
When there is no parallel axis used for the first
system, randomly decide the direction.
#1010 polar/#2033 baseps setting example

System 1: Z1
System 2: X2, Z2
System 3: X3, Z3
The following concerns the polar/baseps setting
method of the axis configuration above.
+
X3 System 3
X direction + basic machine
- coordinate zero point
X2 System 2
basic machine
- coordinate zero - +
+ point Z3
X1 100.000 - +
- Z2 120.000
(Does not 250.000 80.000
exist )
Reference - + Z direction
Z1
point M
(system 1 basic machine coordinate zero point)
2034 m_clamp Manual feed Set the maximum speed for each axis when 0 to 480000 (mm/min)
clamp speed manual clamp is valid. If "0" is set, the rapid
traverse rate (#2001 rapid) will be applied.
III - 32
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2035 pG0t3 G0 time This sets the time constant for rapid traverse Linear acceleration or
during 3-axis superimposition control. 1 to 1500(ms)
acceleration or
deceleration:
1 to 5000(ms)
2036 pG1t3 G1 time This sets the time constant for cutting feed Linear acceleration or
during 3-axis superimposition control. 1 to 1500(ms)
acceleration or
deceleration:
1 to 5000(ms)
2037 pl3rap0 Rapid traverse Set the rapid traverse rate when all three 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
0 during 3-axis superimposition axes move in the same direction
superimposi- with rapid traverse during 3-axis superimposition
tion control.
2038 pl3rap1 Rapid traverse Set the rapid traverse rate when, among three 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
1 during 3-axis superimposition axes, one axis moves with cutting
superimposi- feed and the other two move with rapid traverse in
tion the same direction during 3-axis superimposition
control.
3039 pl3rap2 Rapid traverse Set the rapid traverse rate when, among three 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
2 during 3-axis superimposition axes, two axes move with cutting
superimposi- feed and the other one moves with rapid traverse in
tion the same direction during 3-axis superimposition
control.
2040 pl3clmp0 Cutting Set the cutting feed clamp speed when all three 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
feedrate 0 superimposition axes move in the same direction
during 3-axis during 3-axis superimposition control.
superimposi-
tion
2041 pl3clmp1 Cutting Set the cutting feed clamp speed when, among 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
feedrate 1 three superimposition axes, two axes move with
during 3-axis cutting feed and the other one moves with rapid
superimposi- traverse in the same direction during 3-axis
tion superimposition control.
2042 handle Handle Set the axis movement direction for pulse polarity 0 : Same direction
polarity of manual pulse generator with handle feed. 1 : Opposite direction
2043 tlml_1 Not used. Set to "0". 0
III - 33
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2044 thr_clamp Thread cutting Set the maximum speed for thread cutting feed rate 0 to 480000 (mm/min)
clamp speed each axis.
2045 thr_t1 Thread cutting Set the primary delay time constant for acceleration 0 to 5000 (ms)
time constant /deceleration of thread cutting axis. (Note) When "0" is set,
(primary delay (Note) This parameter is validated when primary "#2008 G1t1" (G01
acceleration/ delay cutting feed rate (C1) is selected with time constant) is
deceleration) "#2003 smgst" acceleration /deceleration. followed.
2046 pG0t_S Time constant Set the acceleration/deceleration adjustment time 1 to 750 (ms)
for G0 constant for rapid traverse acceleration or
acceleration deceleration by software during superimposition
/deceleration control. This setting is validated when acceleration
by software or deceleration by software is selected with "#2003
during smgst" acceleration/deceleration mode.
superimposi-
tion
2047 pG1t_S Time constant Set the acceleration/deceleration adjustment time 1 to 750 (ms)
for G1 constant for cutting feed rate acceleration or
acceleration deceleration by software during superimposition
/deceleration control. This setting is validated when acceleration
by software or deceleration by software is selected with "#2003
during smgst" acceleration/deceleration mode.
superimposi-
tion
2048 pG0t3_S Time constant Set the acceleration/deceleration adjustment time 1 to 750 (ms)
for G0 constant for rapid traverse acceleration or
acceleration deceleration by software during 3-axis
/deceleration superimposition control. This setting is validated
by software when acceleration or deceleration by software is
during 3-axis selected with "#2003 smgst"
superimposi- acceleration/deceleration mode.
tion
2049 pG1t3_S Time constant Set the acceleration/deceleration adjustment time 1 to 750 (ms)
for G1 constant for cutting feed rate acceleration or
acceleration deceleration by software during 3-axis
/deceleration superimposition control. This setting is validated
by software when acceleration or deceleration by software is
during 3-axis selected with "#2003 smgst"
superimposi- acceleration/deceleration mode.
tion
2050 SscDrSel Speed monitor Select which door group of the speed monitoring 0000 to 0003 (HEX)
(PR) Door selection the spindle belongs to.
The speed monitoring is not executed when
SV113:SSF8/BitF is OFF.
0000: Belongs to door 1 group.
0003: Belongs to door 1 and 2 group.
2051 Ssc Svof Speed monitor Set the error detection time of command speed 0 to 9999 (ms)
(PR) Filter Error detection monitoring and feedback speed monitoring during
time during servo OFF.
servo OFF The alarm will occur if the time exceeding safe
speed or safe rotation speed exceeds the set error
detection time.
If "0" is set, it will be handled as 200 (ms).
III - 34
3. Zero Point Return Parameters (Reference Position Return)

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2101 G28rap G28 rapid Set dog-type rapid traverse rate for reference point 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
traverse rate return command.
2102 G28crp G28 approach Define approach speed to reference point after 1 to 480000 (mm/min)
speed deceleration and stop by dog detection for
reference point return command.
2103 G28sft Reference Define distances from electrical zero point 0 to 65535 (µm)
point shift detection position to actual machine reference
amount point for reference point return control.
2104 grspc Grid interval Set the grid interval value for detector. In common 0 to 32767 (mm)
practices, the setting of detector grid interval
should be identical to that of ball screw pitch. In
case that the detector grid interval and the screw
pitch are different for linear scaling, set the detector
grid interval value.
Also, when reducing a grid interval value, use a

common divisor of grid interval.
2105 grmask Grid mask Set intervals where grid points are ignored when 0 to 65535 (µm)
amount near-point dog OFF signal is near-grid point during Also set the submicron
reference point return. meter specifications in
(µm) units.
Near-point dog
Grid mask setting
amount
Effective range of grid mask is distance equivalent

to 1 grid.
III - 35
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2107 dir (-) Reference Set (-) or (+) direction from near-point dog for 0: Positive direction
(PR) point direction reference point position. 1: Negative direction
(-)
<For a dog-type reference point return>
Looking from the near-point, in the direction
establishing the zero point.
- direction + direction
Near-point dog
dir (-)=0
dir (-)=1
<For a dog-less reference point return>

(when base=0)
Looking from the stopper point, in the direction of
the grid point that establishes the absolute
position
- direction + direction
dir (-)=0
rfp >= 0
dir (-)=1 rfp <= 0
Machine end
2108 noref Axis without Designate for axis without reference point; 0: Normal control axis
reference reference point return is not necessary prior to 1: Axis without
point automatic operation. reference point
III - 36
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
2109 ZP_no Spindle Not used. Set to "0". 0
encoder
Z-phase pulse
method
(Not used.)
2110 nochk No completion Not used. Set to "0". 0
check of
reference
point return
(Not used.)
2113 #1_rfp #1 to #4 Set positions of 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference ±999999.999 (mm)
2114 #2_rfp reference points with basic machine coordinate zero point as
2115 #3_rfp points reference points.
2116 #4_rfp
Basic mechanical coordinates

M
Reference position #1
Reference position #2
Reference position #3 Reference position #4
III - 37
4. Servo Parameters
4.1 List of Parameters (MDS-D/DH Series)
4. Servo Parameters
(1) Details for servo parameters
For parameters marked with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. After the power is
turned ON again, the parameter is validated.
! CAUTION
! In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2201 SV001 Motor side Set the motor side and machine side gear ratio. 1 to 32767
(PR) PC1 gear ratio For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration
2202 SV002 Machine side (acceleration) ratio. 1 to 32767
(PR) PC2 gear ratio Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the
electronic gears may overflow and cause an alarm.
2203 SV003 Position loop Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is 1 to 200
PGN1 gain 1 "33". (rad/s)
The higher the setting value is, the more precisely
the command can be followed and the shorter the
positioning time gets, however, note that a bigger
shock is applied to the machine during
acceleration/deceleration.
When using the SHG control, also set SV004
(PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC).
2204 SV004 Position loop When using the SHG control, also set SV003 0 to 999
PGN2 gain 2 (PGN1) and SV057 (SHGC). (rad/s)
When not using the SHG control, set to "0".
2205 SV005 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop gain. 1 to 9999
VGN1 1 Set this according to the load inertia size.
The higher the setting value is, the more accurate
the control will be; however, vibration tends to
occur.
If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 to 30%.
The value should be determined to be 70 to 80% of
the value at the time when the vibration stops.
2206 SV006 Speed loop gain If the noise is bothersome at high speed during -1000 to 9999
VGN2 2 rapid traverse, etc, lower the speed loop gain.
As shown below, set the speed loop gain to
1.15-fold of the motor's maximum speed, and use
this with SV028 (VSC).
When not using, set to "0".
VGN1
VGN2
0 VCS VLMT
(Maximum speed × 1.15)
III - 38
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2207 SV007 Speed loop Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed 0 to 32767
VIL delay loop, or overshooting occurs in positioning.
compensation Select the control method with SV027 (SSF1)/bit1,
0 (vcnt).
Normally, use "Changeover type 2".
When you set this parameter, make sure to set the
torque offset (SV032 (TOF)). When not using, set
to "0".
No changeover
When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=00
The delay compensation control is always valid.
Changeover type 1
The delay compensation control works when the
command from the NC is "0".
Overshooting that occurs during pulse feeding can
be suppressed.
Changeover type 2
The delay compensation control works when the
command from the NC is "0" and the position droop
is "0". Overshooting or the limit cycle that occurs
during pulse feeding or positioning can be
suppressed.
2208 SV008 Speed loop Set the gain of the speed loop integration control. 1 to 9999
VIA lead The standard setting is "1364". During the SHG
compensation control, the standard setting is "1900". Adjust the
value by increasing/decreasing it by about 100 at a
time.
Raise this value to improve contour tracking
precision in high-speed cutting. Lower this value
when the position droop vibrates (10 to 20Hz).
2209 SV009 Current loop q Set the gain of current loop. 1 to 20480
IQA axis lead As this setting is determined by the motor’s
compensation electrical characteristics, the setting is fixed for
2210 SV010 Current loop d each type of motor.
IDA axis lead Set the standard values for all the parameters
compensation depending on each motor type.
2211 SV011 Current loop q 1 to 8192

IQG axis gain
2212 SV012 Current loop d
IDG axis gain
2213 SV013 Current limit Set the normal current (torque) limit value. (Limit 0 to 999
ILMT value values for both + and - direction.) (Stall current %)
When the value is "800" (a standard setting), the
maximum torque is determined by the specification
of the motor.
2214 SV014 Current limit Set the current (torque) limit value in a special 0 to 999
ILMTsp value in special control (initial absolute position setting, stopper (Stall current %)
control control, etc). (Limit values for both of the + and -
directions.)
Set to "800" when not using.
III - 39
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2215 SV015 Acceleration When a relative error in the synchronous control is 0 to 999
FFC rate feed large, apply this parameter to the axis that is (%)
forward gain delaying. The standard setting value is "0". For
the SHG control, set to "100".
To adjust a relative error in
acceleration/deceleration, increase the value by 50
to 100 at a time.
2216 SV016 Lost motion Set this when the protrusion (that occurs due to the -1 to 200
LMC1 compensation non-sensitive band by friction, torsion, backlash, (Stall current %)
1 etc) at quadrant change is too large.
This compensates the torque at quadrant change.
This is valid only when the lost motion
compensation (SV027 (SSF1/lmc)) is selected.
Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit9, 8 (lmc)=10
Set the compensation amount based on the stall
(rated) current of the motor.
The standard setting is double of the friction torque.
Setting to "0" means the compensation amount is
zero.
Other than Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1))/bit9, 8
(lmc) ≠ 10
Lost motion compensation (type 2) is not
performed.
When you wish different compensation amount
depending on the direction
When SV041 (LMC2) is "0", compensate with the
value of SV016 (LMC1) in both of the + and
-directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount
depending on the command direction, set this and
SV041 (LMC2). (SV016: + direction, SV041: -
direction. However, the directions may be
opposite depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be
performed in the direction of the command.
III - 40
4. Servo Parameters
Items Setting range

No. Details
(unit)
2217 SV017 Servo Select the servo specifications.
(PR) SPEC1 specification F E D C B A 9 8
selection 1
spm mp
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
abs fdir vfb seqh dfbx fdir2
bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

Speed feedback forward Speed feedback reverse
0 fdir2
polarity polarity
1 dfbx Dual feedback control stop Dual feedback control start
2 seqh Normal sequence High-speed sequence
Speed feedback filter start
3 spwv Speed feedback filter stop
(2250Hz)
Position feedback forward Position feedback reverse
4 fdir
polarity polarity
5
6
7 abs Incremental control Absolute position control
8 mp MPI scale 360 pole (2mm) MPI scale 180 pole (1mm)
9
A
B
C
Select the motor series.
D
spm 0: HF, HP motor (200V specifications)
E 2: HF-H, HP-H motor (400V specifications)
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.
2218 SV018 Ball screw Set the ball screw pitch. Set to "360" for the rotary axis. 1 to 32767
(PR) PIT pitch (mm/rev)
III - 41
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2219 SV019 Position In the case of the semi-closed loop control 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG1 detector Set the same value as SV020 (RNG2). (Refer to the (kp/rev)
resolution explanation of SV020.)
In the case of the full-closed loop control 0 to 32767
Set the number of pulses per ball screw pitch. (kp/pit)
Detector model name Resolution SV019 setting

OSA105-ET2 1,000,000 (p/rev) 1000
OSA166-ET2 16,000,000 (p/rev) 16000
RCN723 (Heidenhain) 8,000,000 (p/rev) 8000
RCN223 (Heidenhain) 8,000,000 (p/rev) 8000
Refer to specification SV018 (PIT)/
Relative position scale
manual for each detector Rresolution (µm)
AT342 (Mitsutoyo) 0.5 (µm/p)
LC191M (Heidenhain) 0.1, 0.05 (µm/p)
LC491M (Heidenhain) 0.05 (µm/p)
Futaba absolute Refer to specification
position scale (Futaba) manual for each detector
Refer to specification
MPI scale (MHI)
manual for each detector
MDS-B-HR Analog cycle/500
2220 SV020 Speed Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor 1 to 32767
(PR) RNG2 detector end detector. (kp/rev)
resolution Detector model name SV019 setting
OSA105 1000
OSA166 16000
2221 SV021 Overload Set the detection time constant of Overload 1 (Alarm 50). 1 to 999
OLT detection Set to "60" as a standard. (For machine tool builder (s)
time constant adjustment.)
2222 SV022 Overload Set the current detection level of Overload 1 (Alarm 50) in 110 to 500
OLL detection respect to the stall (rated) current. Set to "150" as a (Stall current %)
level standard. (For machine tool builder adjustment.)
2223 SV023 Excessive Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. 0 to 32767
OD1 error <Standard setting value> (mm)
detection
width during Rapid traverse rate
servo ON (mm/min)
OD1=OD2= /2 (mm)
60×PGN1
When "0" is set, the excessive error detection will not be
performed.
III - 42
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2224 SV024 In-position Set the in-position detection width. 0 to 32767
INP detection Set the accuracy required for the machine. (µm)
width The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning
accuracy gets; however, the cycle time (setting time)
becomes longer. The standard setting value is "50".
2225 SV025 Motor/ Set the position detector type, speed detector type and motor type.
(PR) MTYP Detector type
F E D C B A 9 8
pen ent
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mtyp
ent: Set the speed detector type.
pen: Set the position detector type.
Set ent and pen to the same value when using semi-closed droop control.
pen setting ent setting

Detector model name
value value
0 0
1 1
OSA105, OSA166 2 2
- 3 3
4 Setting impossible
5 Setting impossible
OSA105-ET2, OSA166-ET2 6 Setting impossible
- 7 Setting impossible
AT342, AT343, AT345 (Mitsutoyo) 8 Setting impossible

LC191M, LC491M, RCN723,
RCN223 (Heidenhain)
Futaba absolute position scale
(Futaba)
MPI scale (MHI)
MDS-B-HR
- 9 Setting impossible
- A Setting impossible
- B Setting impossible
- C Setting impossible
- D Setting impossible
- E Setting impossible
- F Setting impossible
(To be continued to the next page)
III - 43
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
(Continued from the previous page)
mtyp: Set the motor type. Set according to SV017 (SPEC1)/spm.
(1) For SV017/spm = 0 (200V standard motor series)
mtyp 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
x0
x1 HF75 HP54
x2 HF105 HP104
x3 HF54 HP154
x4 HF104 HP204
x5 HF154 HP354
x6 HP454
x7 HF204 HP704
x8 HF354 HP903
x9 HF453 HP1103
xA HF703
xB HF903
xC
xD
xE
xF
(2) For SV017/spm = 2 (400V standard motor series)

mtyp 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
x0
x1 HF-H75 HP-H54
x2 HF-H105 HP-H104
x3 HF-H54 HP-H154
x4 HF-H104 HP-H204
x5 HF-H154 HP-H354
x6 HP-H454
x7 HF-H204 HP-H704
x8 HF-H354 HP-H903
x9 HF-H453 HP-H1103
xA HF-H703
xB HF-H903
xC
xD
xE
xF
2226 SV026 Excessive error Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. 0 to 32767
OD2 detection width For the standard setting, refer to the explanation of SV023 (mm)
during servo (OD1).
OFF When "0" is set, the excessive error detection will not be
performed.
III - 44
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2227 SV027 Servo
SSF1 function F E D C B A 9 8
selection 1
aflt zrn2 afse ovs lmc
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
zrn3 vfct vcnt

0 Set the execution changeover type of the speed loop delay
vcnt
1 compensation.
00: Delay compensation changeover invalid
01: Delay compensation changeover type 1
10: Delay compensation type 2
11: Setting prohibited
2
3
4 Set the number of compensation pulses of the jitter
vfct
5 compensation.
00: Jitter compensation invalid
01: Jitter compensation 1 pulse
10: Jitter compensation 2 pulses
11: Jitter compensation 3 pulses
Z phase detection: Z phase detection:
6 zrn3
Rising edge detection Detection edge fixed
7
8 Set the compensation amount with SV016 (LMC1) and
lmc
9 SV041 (LMC2).
10: Lost motion compensation type 2 start
Other than 10: Lost motion compensation type 2 stop
A Set the compensation amount with SV031 (OVS1) and
ovs
B SV042 (OVS2).
11: Overshoot compensation type 3 start
Other than 11: Overshoot compensation type 3 stop
C 00: Adoptive filter sensitivity standard
afse
D 11: Adoptive filter sensitivity increase (Set 2bits at a time)
E zrn2 Set to "1".
F aflt Adoptive filter stops Adoptive filter starts
2228 SV028 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
2229 SV029 Speed at If the noise is bothersome at high speed during rapid 0 to 9999
VCS the change traverse, etc, lower the speed loop gain. (r/min)
of speed Set the speed at which the speed loop gain changes, and
loop gain use this with SV006 (VGN2). (Refer to SV006.)
III - 45
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2230 SV030 Voltage When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical 0 to 255
IVC non-sensitive non-energized time will be compensated. (%)
band When "0" is set, a 100% compensation will be
compensation performed.
Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value
100%.
If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may
be generated.
2231 SV031 Overshooting Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. -1 to 100
OVS2 compensation This compensates the motor torque during positioning. (Stall current %)
1 This is valid only when the overshooting compensation
SV027 (SSF1/ovs) is selected.
Type 3: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)=11
Set the compensation amount based on the motor’s
stall current.
Increase by 1% and determine the amount that
overshooting doesn’t occur.
Other than type 3: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)
≠11
Overshooting compensation (Type 2) is not executed.
When SV042 (OVS2) is "0", compensate with the
value of SV031 (OVS1) in both of the + and
-directions.
SV042 (OVS2). (SV031: + direction, SV042: -
direction. However, the directions may be opposite
depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be performed
in the direction of the command.
2232 SV032 Torque offset 1 Set the unbalance torque of vertical axis and inclined -100 to 100
TOF axis. (Stall current %)
III - 46
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2233 SV033 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF2 selection 2
F E D C B A 9 8
rps dos
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nfd2 nf3 nfd1 zck

0 zck Z phase check valid (Alarm 42) Z phase check invalid
1 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 1 (SV038).
2 nfd1 Deep ← → Shallow
3 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
(dB)
4 nfd3 Notch filter 3 stop Notch filter 3 start (1125Hz)
6 nfd2 Deep ← → Shallow
7 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
(dB)
8
9
A
B
C dos Normal use Specified speed output
Specified speed output setting Specified speed output setting
D rps
unit mm/min unit 100mm/min
E
F
III - 47
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
SSF3 selection 3
F E D C B A 9 8
ovsn
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Set the non-sensitive band of the overshooting compensation
D type 3 in increments of 2µm at a time.
ovsn In the feed forward control, the non-sensitive band of the model
E position droop is set, and overshooting of the model is ignored.
F Set 2µm (0001) as a standard.
III - 48
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
SSF4 selection 4
F E D C B A 9 8
clt clG1 cl2n clet cltq
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Set the retracting torque for collision detection in respect to the
8
cltq maximum torque of the motor.
9 00:100% 01:90% 10:80% (Standard) 11:70%
Setting for normal use The disturbance torque peak
of the latest two seconds is
A clet
displayed in MPOS of the
servo monitor screen.
Collision detection method 2 Collision detection method 2
B cl2n
valid invalid
C Collision detection method 1
D Set the collision detection level during cutting feed (G1).
clG1 The G1 collision detection level=SV060×clG1.
E When clG1=0, the collision detection method 1 during cutting
feed won’t function.
Setting for normal use The guide value of the SV059
setting value is displayed in
F clt
MPOS of the servo monitor
screen.
III - 49
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2236 SV036 Power supply Set the power supply type.
(PR) PTYP type F E D C B A 9 8
amp rtyp
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ptyp

0 ptyp When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power
1 supply are connected, setting below is necessary.
2 Always set when using the NC communication terminator unit.
3 MDS-D-CV MDS-DH-CV
4 External External External External
5 emergency emergency emergency emergency
stop invalid stop valid stop invalid stop valid
6
CV-37 04 44 04 44
7
CV-75 08 48 08 48
CV-110 11 51 11 51
CV-185 19 59 19 59
CV-300 30 70 30 70
CV-370 37 77 37 77
CV-450 45 85 45 85
CV-550 55 95 - -
CV-750 - - 75 B5
8 Set "0".
9
rtyp
A
B
C Set "0".
D
amp
E
F
2237 SV037 Load inertia Set "the motor inertia + motor axis conversion load 0 to 5000
JL scale inertia" in respect to the motor inertia. (%)
Jm+Jl
SV037(JL)= ×100
Jm
Jm : Motor inertia
Jl : Motor axis conversion load inertia
III - 50
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2238 SV038 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine 0 to 2250
FHz1 frequency 1 vibration occurs. (Hz)
(Valid at 50 or more) When not using, set to "0".
2239 SV039 Lost motion Set this when the lost motion compensation timing 0 to 2000
LMCD compensation does not match. (ms)
timing Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time.
2240 SV040 Lost motion Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion 0 to 255
LMCT compensation compensation in the feed forward control. (µm)
non-sensitive When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 2µm.
band Adjust by increasing by 1µm at a time.
2241 SV041 Lost motion Set this with SV016 (LMC1) only when you wish to set -1 to 200
LMC2 compensation 2 the lost motion compensation amount to be different (Stall current %)
depending on the command directions.
Set to "0" as a standard.
2242 SV042 Overshooting Set this with SV031 (OVS1) only when you wish to set -1 to 100
OVS2 compensation 2 the overshooting compensation amount to be different (Stall current %)
depending on the command directions.
2243 SV043 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer filter band. 0 to 1000
OBS1 observer filter Set to "100" as a standard. (rad/s)
frequency To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL)
and SV044 (OBS2). When not using, set to "0".
2244 SV044 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard 0 to 500
OBS2 observer gain setting is "100" to "300". (%)
To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL)
2245 SV045 Frictional When you use the collision detection function, set the 0 to 255
TRUB torque frictional torque. (Stall current %)
(Low
order)
2246 SV046 Notch filter If the machine vibrates, set the vibration frequency to 0 to 2250
FHz2 frequency 2 be suppressed. (Hz)
(Valid when set to 50 or more.) When not using, set to
"0".
III - 51
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2247 SV047 Inductive Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Set 0 to 200
EC1 voltage to "100" as a standard. (%)
compensation If the current FB peak exceeds the current
gain command peak, lower the gain.
2248 SV048 Vertical axis Input a length of time to prevent the vertical axis 0 to 20000
EMGrt drop from dropping by delaying Ready OFF until the (ms)
prevention time brake works when the emergency stop occurs.
Increase the setting by 100ms at a time and set the
value where the axis does not drop.
2249 SV049 Position loop Set the position loop gain for synchronous tap 1 to 200
PGN1sp gain 1 in control. (rad/s)
spindle Set the same value as the value of the spindle
synchroniza- parameter, position loop gain in synchronous
tion control control.
When performing the SHG control, set this with
SV050 (PGN2sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp).
2250 SV050 Position loop When using SHG control during synchronous tap 0 to 999
PGN2sp gain 2 in control, set both SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV058 (rad/s)
spindle (SHGCsp).
synchroniza- When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
tion control
2251 SV051 Dual feed back Set the control time constant in dual feed back. 0 to 9999
DFBT control time When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 1ms. (ms)
constant The higher the time constant is, the closer it gets to
the semi-closed control, so the limit of the position
loop gain is raised.
2252 SV052 Dual feedback Set the non-sensitive band in the dual feedback 0 to 9999
DFBN control control. (µm)
non-sensitive Set to "0" as a standard.
band
2253 SV053 Excessive error Set the excessive error detection width when servo 0 to 32767
OD3 detection width ON in a special control (initial absolute position (mm)
in special setting, stopper control, etc.).
control If "0" is set, excessive error detection won’t be
performed when servo ON during a special control.
2254 SV054 Overrun Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed -1 to 32767
ORE detection width loop control. (mm)
in closed loop If the gap between the motor end detector and the
control linear scale (machine end detector) exceeds the
value set by this parameter, it is judged to be
overrun and Alarm 43 will be detected.
When "-1" is set, the alarm detection won’t be
performed. When "0" is set, overrun is detected
with a 2mm width.
2255 SV055 Max. gate off Set a length of time from the point when the 0 to 20000
EMGx delay time after emergency stop is input to the point when READY (ms)
emergency OFF is compulsorily executed.
stop Normally, set the same value as the absolute value
of SV056.
In preventing the vertical axis from dropping, the
gate off is delayed for the length of time set by
SV048 if SV055’s value is smaller than that of
SV048.
III - 52
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2256 SV056 Deceleration In the vertical axis drop prevention control, set the -20000 to 20000
EMGt time constant time constant used for the deceleration control at (ms)
at emergency emergency stop. Set a length of time that takes
stop from rapid traverse rate (rapid) to stopping.
Normally, set the same value as the rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration time constant.
When executing the synchronous operation, put the
minus sign to the settings of both of the master axis
and slave axis.
2257 SV057 SHG control When performing the SHG control, set this with 0 to 1200
SHGC gain S003 (PGN1) and SV004 (PGN2). (rad/s)
When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
2258 SV058 SHG control When using SHG control during synchronous tap 0 to 1200
SHGCsp gain in control, set both SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV050 (rad/s)
spindle (PGN2sp).
synchroniza- When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
tion control
2259 SV059 Collision Set the torque estimating gain when using the -32768 to 32767
TCNV detection collision detection function.
torque After setting as SV035/bitF(clt)=1 and performing
estimating acceleration/deceleration, set the value displayed in
gain MPOS of the NC servo monitor screen.
Set to "0" when not using the collision detection
function.
2260 SV060 Collision When using the collision detection function, set the 0 to 999
TLMT detection collision detection level during the G0 feeding. (Stall current %)
level If "0" is set, none of the collision detection function
will work.
2261 SV061 D/A output Input the data number you wish to output to D/A -1 to 4
DA1NO channel 1 output channel.
data No. When using the 2-axis drive unit, set "-1" for the axis
2262 SV062 D/A output on the side to which the data will not be output.
DA2NO channel 2
data No.
2263 SV063 D/A output Set the scale with a 1/100 unit. -32768 to 32767
DA1MPY channel 1 When "0" is set, output is done with the standard (Unit: 1/100)
output scale output unit.
2264 SV064 D/A output
DA2MPY channel 2
output scale
2265 SV065 Machine end Set the machine end compensation spring constant. -32768 to 32767
TLC compensation For semi-closed droop control, the machine end
spring compensation amount can be approximated with
constant the following expression.
2
Compensation Command speed F(mm/min) ×SV065
= (µm)
amount
Radius R(mm) × 109

2273 SV073 Specified Set the specified speed as a mm/min unit. 0 to 32767
(PR) FEED speed output When SV033/bitD (rps) is set to 1, set the speed
out speed with a 100mm/min unit.
III - 53
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2281 SV081 Servo Select the servo specifications.
(PR) SPEC2 specification
selction 2 F E D C B A 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
III - 54
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
SSF5 selection 5
F E D C B A 9 8
dis alcdsp
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
lmc3 lmct

Lost motion compensation 3 Lost motion compensation 3
0 lmct adjustment time adjustment time
measurement invalid measurement valid
1 lmc3
stop start
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 alcdsp Alarm history display Alarm counter display
9
A
B
C Digital signal input selection
D 0 : No signal
dis
E 1 : Safety observation function door state signal
F 2 to F : Setting prohibited
III - 55
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
SSF6 selection 6
F E D C B A 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nfd5 nfd4

0
2 This is valid only when SV119 is set to 0.
3 nfd4 Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth (dB) -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
4
6 This is valid only when SV120 is set to 0.
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth (dB) -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
III - 56
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
SSF7 selection 7
F E D C B A 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
irms

0 irms Normal motor current display Effective motor current display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
2285 SV085 Lost motion Set the machine system's spring constant when using 0 to 32767
LMCk compensation lost motion compensation type 3.
3 spring When not using, set to "0".
constant
2286 SV086 Lost motion Set the machine system's viscous coefficient when using 0 to 32767
LMCc compensation lost motion compensation type 3.
3 viscous When not using, set to "0".
coefficient
FHz4 frequency 4 vibration occurs. (Valid at 50 or more) (Hz)
FHz5 frequency 5 vibration occurs. (Valid at 50 or more) (Hz)
III - 57
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2289 SV089 Torque Normally set this to "0". (For machine tool builder 0 to 32767
TQMA maximizing adjustment)
X Kq control Kp
2290 SV090 Torque Normally set this to "0". (For machine tool builder 0 to 32767
TQMA maximizing adjustment)
X Kd control Kd
2291 SV091 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
2311 SV111
2312 SV112 Number of Set the number of rippers per motor rotation. 0
RDCN ripple
disturbance
compensations
SSF8 selection 8
F E D C B A 9 8
ssc
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
Safety observation function Safety observation function
F ssc
invalid valid
III - 58
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
SSF9 selection 9
F E D C B A 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
III - 59
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
SSF10 selection 10
F E D C B A 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
III - 60
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
SSF11 selection 11
F E D C B A 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
III - 61
4. Servo Parameters
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
(PR) Set to "0".
2319 SV119 Notch filter Set the notch filter target attenuation amount and 0 to 32767
FSP4 4 damping coefficient.
specification Add a value 10000-fold the damping coefficient to the
2320 SV120 Notch filter target attenuation rate -dB absolute value, and set.
FSP5 5 The setting range of each coefficient is as follows.
specification Damping coefficient: 0.01 to 1.00 (0.01 increments)
When 0 is set, the value is 1.00.
Target attenuation amount:
-80dB to -1dB (1dB increments) When 0 is set, the
value is -80dB.
(Example) To set target attenuation amount to -40dB
and damping coefficient to 1.00
1.00×10000+ABS(-40)=10040
When using nfd4 or ndf5 of SV083, set "0".
: : Set to "0".
2323 SV123
2438 SV238 Safety Set the safety speed at machine end when using the 0 to 18000
observation safety observation function. (mm/min) or
SSCFEED
Safety (°/min)
Upper limit of liner axis: 2000 (mm/min)
speed
Upper limit of rotation axis: 18000 (°/min) [50(r/min)]
Set to "0" when not using this function.
2439 SV239 Safety Set the safe motor rotation speed when using the safety 0 to 32767
SSCRPM observation observation function. (r/min)
Safety When FB speed which is 1 or more (r/min) faster than
rotation the setting value is detected, the alarm will occur.
speed
III - 62
4. Servo Parameters
(2) List of standard parameters for each servomotor

The standard parameters for each motor are given below.
The standard parameters are set to drive the isolated motor. When setting the parameters with the
actual machine, set the parameters according to the machine specifications and detector being used,
etc.
(a) 200V Standard motor HF Series

Motor HF75 HF105 HF54 HF104 HF154 HF204 HF354 HF453 HF703 HF903
Drive unit
20 20 40 40 80 80 160 160 160W 320
MDS-D-V1-
SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - - -
SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - - -
SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV005 VGN1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364
SV009 IQA 20480 10240 20480 10240 10240 8192 8192 6144 6144 4096
SV010 IDA 20480 10240 20480 10240 10240 8192 8192 6144 6144 4096
SV011 IQG 768 512 3072 1280 1536 2048 2048 2048 2048 1536
SV012 IDG 768 512 3072 1280 1536 2048 2048 2048 2048 1536
SV013 ILMT 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV014 ILMTsp 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - - -
SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - - -
SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - - -
SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
SV025 MTYP xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx07 xx08 xx09 xx0A xx0B
SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
III - 63
4. Servo Parameters
Motor HF75 HF105 HF54 HF104 HF154 HF204 HF354 HF453 HF703 HF903
Drive unit
20 20 40 40 80 80 160 160 160W 320
MDS-D-V1-
SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV047 EC1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV066 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
: : : : : : : : : : :
SV256 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note that a value other than "0" may be automatically set by the NC system for the system setting parameters.
III - 64
4. Servo Parameters
(b) 200V Standard motor HP Series

Motor HP54 HP104 HP154 HP204 HP354 HP454 HP704 HP903 HP1103
Drive unit
40 40 80 80 160 160 160W 320 320W
MDS-D-V1-
SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - -
SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - -
SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV005 VGN1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364
SV009 IQA 8192 4096 6144 3072 4096 3072 3072 2048 2048
SV010 IDA 8192 4096 6144 3072 4096 3072 3072 2048 2048
SV011 IQG 1280 768 1536 1024 1280 1024 1024 1280 1280
SV012 IDG 1280 768 1536 1024 1280 1024 1024 1280 1280
SV013 ILMT 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV014 ILMTsp 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - -
SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - -
SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - -
SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
SV025 MTYP xx11 xx12 xx13 xx14 xx15 xx16 xx17 xx18 xx19
SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
III - 65
4. Servo Parameters
Motor HP54 HP104 HP154 HP204 HP354 HP454 HP704 HP903 HP1103
Drive unit
40 40 80 80 160 160 160W 320 320W
MDS-D-V1-
SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV047 EC1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV066 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
: : : : : : : : : :
SV256 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
III - 66
4. Servo Parameters
(c) 400V Standard motor HF-H Series

Motor HF-H75 HF-H105 HF-H54 HF-H104 HF-H154 HF-H204 HF-H354 HF-H453 HF-H703 HF-H903
Drive unit
10 10 20 20 40 40 80 80 80W 160
MDS-DH-V1-
SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - - -
SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - - -
SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV005 VGN1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364
SV009 IQA 20480 10240 20480 10240 15360 8192 8192 6144 6144 6144
SV010 IDA 20480 10240 20480 10240 15360 8192 8192 6144 6144 6144
SV011 IQG 768 512 3072 1280 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048
SV012 IDG 768 512 3072 1280 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048
SV013 ILMT 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV014 ILMTsp 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV017 SPEC 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - - -
SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - - -
SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - - -
SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
SV025 MTYP xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx07 xx08 xx09 xx0A xx0B
SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
III - 67
4. Servo Parameters
Motor HF-H75 HF-H105 HF-H54 HF-H104 HF-H154 HF-H204 HF-H354 HF-H453 HF-H703 HF-H903
Drive unit
10 10 20 20 40 40 80 80 80W 160
MDS-DH-V1-
SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV047 EC1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV066 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
: : : : : : : : : : :
SV256 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
III - 68
4. Servo Parameters
(d) 400V Standard motor HP-H Series

Motor HP-H54 HP-H104 HP-H154 HP-H204 HP-H354 HP-H454 HP-H704 HP-H903 HP-H1103
Drive unit
20 20 40 40 80 80 80W 160 160W
MDS-DH-V1-
SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - -
SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - -
SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV005 VGN1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364
SV009 IQA 8192 4096 6144 3072 4096 3072 3072 2048 2048
SV010 IDA 8192 4096 6144 3072 4096 3072 3072 2048 2048
SV011 IQG 1280 768 1536 1024 1280 1024 1024 1280 1280
SV012 IDG 1280 768 1536 1024 1280 1024 1024 1280 1280
SV013 ILMT 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV014 ILMTsp 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV017 SPEC 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - -
SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - -
SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - -
SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
SV025 MTYP xx11 xx12 xx13 xx14 xx15 xx16 xx17 xx18 xx19
SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
III - 69
4. Servo Parameters
Motor HP-H54 HP-H104 HP-H154 HP-H204 HP-H354 HP-H454 HP-H704 HP-H903 HP-H1103
Drive unit
20 20 40 40 80 80 80W 160 160W
MDS-DH-V1-
SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV047 EC1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV066 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
: : : : : : : : : :
SV256 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
III - 70
4. Servo Parameters
4.2 Supplement (MDS-D/DH Series)

4.2.1 D/A Output No.
(1) D/A output specifications
Item Explanation
Number of channels 2ch
Output cycle 888µs (min. value)
Output precision 12bit
Output voltage
0V to 2.5V to +5V
range
CN9 connector
-32768 to 32767% Pin Signal Pin Signal
Output scale setting
(1% increments) 1 LG 11 LG
CN9 connector 2 12
3 13
MO1 = pin 9
Output pins 4 14
MO2 = pin 19 5 15
GND = pin 1, 11 6 16
The D/A output is 2ch even 7 17
for the 2-axis drive unit 8 18
(MDS-D/DH-V2). 9 MO1 19 MO2
10 20
Thus, when using the 2-axis
Others
drive unit, set -1 for the
output data (SV061, 62) of
the axis which is not to be
measured.
(2) Setting the output data

Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
# No. Abbrev. Parameter name
2261 SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
2262 SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.
No. Details Output unit

-1 D/A output stop -
0 Motor speed 1000(r/min)/V
1 Current command 100%/V
2 Current feedback 100%/V
3 Position droop 1mm/V
4 Command F∆T 1mm/0.8ms/V
5
6
7
8
9
10
III - 71
4. Servo Parameters
4.2.2 Electronic Gears

The servo drive unit has internal electronic gears. The command value from the NC is converted into a
detector resolution unit to carry out position control. The electronic gears are single gear ratios calculated
from multiple parameters as shown below. However, each value (ELG1, ELG2) must be less than 32767.
If the value overflows, the initial parameter error (alarm 37) or error parameter No.2301 will be output.
If an alarm occurs, the mechanical specifications and electrical specifications must be revised so that the
electronic gears are within the specifications range.
(1) For semi-closed loop control

ELG1 PC2 × RNG1
Reduced fraction of ELG2 = PC1 × PIT × IUNIT (reduced fraction)
IUNIT = 2/NC (µm) command unit

1µm : IUNIT = 2, 0.1µm : IUNIT = 20
When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied.

ELG1 ≤ 32767
ELG2 ≤ 32767
(2) For full-closed loop control

PGNX PC2 × RNG2 × PGN1
Reduced fraction of PGNY = PC1 × RNG1 × 30
(reduced fraction)

PGNX ≤ 32767
PGNY ≤ 32767
And,
PGNXsp PC2 × RNG2 × PGN1sp
Reduced fraction of PGNYsp = PC1 × RNG1 × 30
(reduced fraction)

PGNXsp ≤ 32767
PGNYsp ≤ 32767
III - 72
4. Servo Parameters
4.2.3 Lost Motion Compensation

When the motor is to rotate in the clockwise direction (looking from the load side) at the command for the +
direction, the command direction is CW. Conversely, when the motor is to rotate in the counterclockwise
direction, the command direction is CCW.
This rotation direction can be set with the CNC machine parameters. Note that the meaning of the ± will
differ for some servo parameters according to this motor rotation direction. The servo parameters affected by
CW/CCW are shown below.
SV016 (LMC1), SV041 (LMC2) (When different values are set for SV016 and SV041)
<Example> If the lost motion compensation amount is to be changed according to the direction, the
compensation amount at the quadrant changeover point of each arc where the lost motion
compensation is applied will be as shown below according to the command polarity.
CW CCW
A X: SV041 X: SV016
B Y: SV016 Y: SV041
C X: SV016 X: SV041
D Y: SV041 Y: SV016
+Y The Y axis command

D direction changes from
the + to - direction.
The X axis command

A direction changes from
the + to - direction.
-X +X
The X axis command

C direction changes from
the - to + direction.
The Y axis command
B direction changes from
-Y
(Note) The setting value for the parameter is "0" or "-1", the compensation amount is determined as
shown below.
Compensation Compensation
Setting value Setting value
amount amount
for SV016 for SV041
in + direction in - direction
0 0 No compensation No compensation
n 0 n n
0 m m m
n m n m
n -1 n No compensation
-1 m No compensation m
III - 73
4. Servo Parameters
4.3 List of Parameters (Intelligent Servomotor)
Set all parameters not used, including blank bits, to "0".

Refer to each the following manual for details on each motor.
MELDAS INTELLIGENT SERVOMOTOR HS Series SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTION MANUAL

... BNP-B3981
(1) Details for servo parameters
For parameters marked with a "(PR)" in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. After the power is
turned ON again, the parameter is validated.
! CAUTION
No. Items Details Setting range

2201 SV001 Motor side Set the motor side and machine side gear ratio. 1 to 32767
(PR) PC1 gear ratio For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration
2202 SV002 Machine side (acceleration) ratio. 1 to 32767
(PR) PC2 gear ratio Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the
electronic gears may overflow and cause an alarm.
2203 SV003 Position loop Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is 1 to 200
PGN1 gain 1 "33". (rad/s)
The higher the setting value is, the more precisely
the command can be followed and the shorter the
positioning time gets, however, note that a bigger
shock is applied to the machine during
acceleration/deceleration.
When using the SHG control, also set SV004
(PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC).
2204 SV004 Position loop When using the SHG control, also set SV003 0 to 999
PGN2 gain 2 (PGN1) and SV057 (SHGC). (rad/s)
When not using the SHG control, set to "0".
2205 SV005 Speed loop Set the speed loop gain. 1 to 999
VGN1 gain Set this according to the load inertia size.
The higher the setting value is, the more accurate
the control will be, however, vibration tends to
occur.
The value should be determined to be 70 to 80% of
the value at the time when the vibration stops.
2208 SV008 Speed loop Set the gain of the speed loop integration control. 1 to 9999
VIA lead The standard setting is "1364". During the SHG
compensation control, the standard setting is "1900". Adjust the
value by increasing/decreasing it by about 100 at a
time.
Raise this value to improve contour tracking
precision in high-speed cutting. Lower this value
when the position droop vibrates (10 to 20Hz).
III - 74
4. Servo Parameters

2209 SV009 Current loop q Set the gain of current loop. 1 to 20480
IQA axis lead As this setting is determined by the motor’s
compensation electrical characteristics, the setting is fixed for each
2210 SV010 Current loop d type of motor. 1 to 20480
IDA axis lead Set the standard values for all the parameters
compensation depending on each motor type.
2211 SV011 Current loop q 1 to 2560

IQG axis gain
2212 SV012 Current loop d 1 to 2560
IDG axis gain
2213 SV013 Current limit Set the normal current (torque) limit value. (Limit 0 to 500
ILMT value values for both + and - direction.) (Stall [rated]
When the value is "500" (a standard setting), the current %)
maximum torque is determined by the specification
of the motor.
2214 SV014 Current limit Set the current (torque) limit value in a special 0 to 500
ILMTsp value in special control (initial absolute position setting, stopper (Stall [rated]
control control, etc). (Limit values for both of the + and - current %)
directions.)
2215 SV015 Acceleration When a relative error in the synchronous control is 0 to 999
FFC rate feed large, apply this parameter to the axis that is (%)
forward gain delaying. The standard setting value is "0". For
the SHG control, set to "100".
To adjust a relative error in acceleration/
deceleration, increase the value by 50 to 100 at a
time.
III - 75
4. Servo Parameters

2216 SV016 Lost motion Set this when the protrusion (that occurs due to the
LMC1 compensation non-sensitive band by friction, torsion, backlash,
1 etc) at quadrant change is too large.
This is valid only when the lost motion
compensation (SV027 (SSF1/lmc)) is selected.
Type 1: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit9, 8 (lmc)=01 -1 to 200
Set the compensation amount based on the motor (%)
torque before the quadrant change.
The standard setting is "100". Setting to "0"
means the compensation amount is zero.
Normally, use Type 2.
Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit9, 8 (lmc)=10 -1 to 100
Set the compensation amount based on the stall (Stall [rated]
(rated) current of the motor. current %)
The standard setting is double of the friction torque.
Setting to "0" means the compensation amount is
zero.
When SV041 (LMC2) is "0", compensate with the
value of SV016 (LMC1) in both of the + and
-directions.
SV041 (LMC2). (SV016: + direction, SV041: -
direction. However, the directions may be
opposite depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be
performed in the direction of the command.
III - 76
4. Servo Parameters

2217 SV017 Servo F E D C B A 9 8
(PR) SPEC specification mtc
selection
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
abs dmk

Deceleration control stop
0 dmk Dynamic brake stop
(SVJ2 standard)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 abs Incremental control Absolute position control
8
9
A
B
C mtc
D Motor table selection according to model
E Set 0100 for the intelligent servomotor HS Series.
F
2218 SV018 Ball screw Set the ball screw pitch. Set to "360" for the rotary axis. 1 to 32767
(PR) PIT pitch (mm/rev)
2219 SV019 Position For both parameters, set the number of pulses per one 8 to 100
(PR) RNG1 detector revolution of the motor detector. (kp/rev)
resolution
2220 SV020 Speed
(PR) RNG2 detector
resolution
2221 SV021 Overload Set the detection time constant of Overload 1 (Alarm 50). 1 to 300
OLT detection Set to "60" as a standard. (For machine tool builder (s)
time constant adjustment.)
2222 SV022 Overload Set the current detection level of Overload 1 (Alarm 50) in 50 to 500
OLL detection respect to the stall (rated) current. Set to "150" as a (Stall [rated]
level standard. (For machine tool builder adjustment.)
current %)
III - 77
4. Servo Parameters

OD1 error <Standard setting value> (mm)
detection
width during Rapid traverse rate
servo ON (mm/min)
OD1=OD2= /2 (mm)
60*PGN1
When "0" is set, the excessive error detection will not be
performed.
2224 SV024 In-position Set the in-position detection width. 0 to 32767
INP detection Set the accuracy required for the machine. (µm)
width The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning
accuracy gets, however, the cycle time (setting time)
becomes longer. The standard setting is "50".
2225 SV025 Motor/ Set the motor type. HEX setting
(PR) MTYP Detector Refer to the Standard parameter list per motor for the
type settings.
OD2 error For the standard setting, refer to the explanation of (mm)
detection SV023 (OD1).
width during When "0" is set, the excessive error detection will not be
servo OFF performed.
SSF1 function ovs1 lmc2 lmc1
selection 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
cln vfct2 vfct1

0
1
2
3
4 vfct1 Set the jitter compensation No. of compensation pulses with a
5 vfct2 binary.
Collision detection invalid Collision detection valid at all
6 cln
during deceleration to stop times
7
Lost motion compensation Lost motion compensation
8 lmc1
type 1 stop type 1 start
Lost motion compensation Lost motion compensation
9 lmc2
Overshooting compensation Overshooting compensation
A ovs1
B
C
D
E Set to "1".
F
III - 78
4. Servo Parameters

2230 SV030 Voltage Set the voltage non-sensitive band compensation 0
IVC non-sensitive amount in the low-order 8 bits.
band Normally set to 0. Set 20 to use this function.
compensation Set the fine torque compensation amount Cx in the
/fine torque high-order 8 bits.
compensation Normally set to 0. Set 255 to use this function.
Cx The following will result if 20 is set as the voltage
non-sensitive compensation amount, and 255 is set as
the fine torque amount.
255 × 256 +20 =65300 65300 - 65536 = -236
2231 SV031 Overshooting Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. This -1 to 100
OVS1 compensation compensates the motor torque during positioning. (Stall [rated]
1 This is valid only when the overshooting compensation current %)
SV027 (SSF1/ovs) is selected.
Type 1: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit11, 10 (ovs)=01
Set the compensation amount based on the motor’s
stall (rated) current.
Increase by 1% and determine the amount that
overshooting doesn’t occur.
In Type 1, compensation during the feed forward
control during circular cutting won’t be performed.
Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit11, 10 (ovs)=10
Use this if you perform the overshooting compensation
during the feed forward control during circular cutting.
The setting method is the same in Type 1.
When SV042 (OVS2) is "0", compensate with the value
of SV031 (OVS1) in both of the + and -directions.
SV042 (OVS2). (SV031: + direction, SV042: -
direction. However, the directions may be opposite
depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be performed
in the direction of the command.
2232 SV032 Torque offset Set the unbalance torque of vertical axis and inclined -100 to 100
TOF axis. (Stall [rated]
current %)
III - 79
4. Servo Parameters

SSF2 function
selection 2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nfd

0 Set the filter depth for Notch filter (SV038: FHz1).
1 The control is stabilized by making the filter shallower.
2 nfd Value 0 2 4 6 8 A C E
Depth Infntly
3 -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
(dB) deep
Deep Shallow
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SSF3 function
selection 3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
daf1 dac1 mon
NC servo monitor MAX current display data changeover
0 mon Current command monitor value Current FB monitor value
1
2
3
4 dac1 D/A output ch.1 overflow setting D/A output ch.1 clamp setting
5
6 daf1 D/A output ch.1 no filter D/A output ch.1 filter setting
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
III - 80
4. Servo Parameters

SSF4 function clt clG1 cl2n clet
selection 4
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
eram

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 eram Extended function invalid Extended function invalid
8
9
The latest two-second
estimated disturbance torque
A clet During normal use peak value (3.5ms average
value) is displayed at MPOF
on the Servo Monitor screen.
Collision detection method 2 Collision detection method 2
B cl2n
valid invalid
C Set the collision detection level for collision detection method 1,
cutting (G1) feed.
D clG1 The G1 collision detection level is SV060 × clG1.
When clG1 is set to 0, the collision detection method 1 will not
E function during cutting feed.
The value to be set in TCNV is
calculated and displayed at
F clt During normal use
MPOF on the Servo Monitor
screen.
2236 SV036 Regenera- Set the regenerative resistor type. 1000
(PR) PTYP tive resistor (Always set "1000".)
type
2237 SV037 Load inertia Set "the motor inertia + motor axis conversion load 0 to 5000
JL scale inertia" in respect to the motor inertia. (%)
Jl+Jm
SV037 (JL) = *100
Jm
Jm: Motor inertia
Jl: Motor axis conversion load inertia
FHz1 frequency 1 vibration occurs. (Hz)
III - 81
4. Servo Parameters

2239 SV039 Lost motion Set this when the lost motion compensation timing 0 to 2000
LMCD compensation doest not match. (ms)
2240 SV040 Lost motion The lost motion compensation non-sensitive band can -32768 to 32767
LMCT compensation be set only during feed forward control. Set in the
(µm)
non-sensitive low-order 8 bits. The setting range is 0 to 100. When 0
band/fine is set, 2µm will be set. Adjust the value in increments of
torque 1µm.
compensation Set the fine torque compensation Cy in the high-order 8
Cy bits. Normally, set 0. Set 255 to use this function.
The following will result when 5 is set as the lost motion
compensation non-sensitive band, and 255 is set as
the fine torque compensation Cy.
255 × 265 + 5 = 65285 65285 - 65536 = -251
2241 SV041 Lost motion Set this with SV016 (LMC1) only when you wish to set -1 to 200
LMC2 compensation the lost motion compensation amount to be different (Stall [rated]
2 depending on the command directions. current %)
2242 SV042 Overshooting Set this with SV031 (OVS1) only when you wish to set -1 to 100
OVS2 compensation the overshooting compensation amount to be different (Stall [rated]
2 depending on the command directions. current %)
2243 SV043 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer filter band. 0 to 1000
OBS1 observer filter The standard setting is "600". Lower the setting by 50 (rad/s)
frequency at a time if vibration occurs.
2244 SV044 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard setting 0 to 1000
OBS2 observer gain is "100" to "300". (%)
2245 SV045 Collision Set 0 as the standard. -32768 to 32767
TRUB detection To use the collision detection function, set the frictional (Stall [rated]
function torque as a percentage of the stall rated current in the current %)
frictional low-order 8 bits. (0 to 100)
torque/fine To use fine torque compensation, set approx. 10 to 30
torque in the high-order 8 bits.
compensation The following will result when 30 is set as the frictional
torque, and 20 is set as the fine torque compensation.
30 + 20 × 256 = 5150
2247 SV047 Inductive Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Set to 0 to 200
EC voltage "70" as a standard. (%)
compensation If the current FB peak exceeds the current command
gain peak, lower the gain.
2248 SV048 Vertical axis Input a length of time to prevent the vertical axis from 0 to 2000
EMGrt drop dropping by delaying Ready OFF until the brake works (ms)
prevention when the emergency stop occurs.
time Increase the setting by 100ms at a time and set the
value where the axis does not drop.
III - 82
4. Servo Parameters

2249 SV049 Position loop Set the position loop gain during the spindle 1 to 200
PGN1sp gain 1 in synchronization control (synchronous tapping, (rad/s)
spindle synchronous control with spindle/C axis).
synchroniza- Set the same value as the value of the spindle
tion control parameter, position loop gain in synchronous
control.
When performing the SHG control, set this with
SV050 (PGN2sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp).
2250 PGN2sp Position loop Set this with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV058 0 to 999
gain 2 in (SHGCsp) if you wish to perform the SHG control in (rad/s)
spindle the spindle synchronization control (synchronous
synchroniza- tapping, synchronous control with spindle/C axis).
tion control When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
2253 SV053 Excessive Set the excessive error detection width when servo 0 to 32767
OD3 error ON in a special control (initial absolute position (mm)
detection setting, stopper control, etc.).
width in If "0" is set, excessive error detection won’t be
special performed when servo ON during a special control.
control
2256 SV056 Deceleration Set the time constant used for the deceleration 0 to 5000
EMGt time constant control at emergency stop. Set a length of time that (ms)
at emergency takes from rapid traverse rate (rapid) to stopping.
stop Normally, set the same value as the rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration time constant.
2257 SV057 SHG control When performing the SHG control, set this with 0 to 999
SHGC gain S003 (PGN1) and SV004 (PGN2). (rad/s)
When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
2258 SV058 SHG control Set this with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV050 0 to 999
SHGCsp gain in (PGN2sp) if you wish to perform the SHG control in (rad/s)
spindle the spindle synchronization control (synchronous
synchroniza- tapping, synchronous control with spindle/C axis).
tion control When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
2259 SV059 Collision To use the collision detection function, set the 0 to 5000
TCNV detection torque estimating gain. (%)
torque After setting Sv035:SSF4/clt to 1 and carrying out
estimating acceleration/deceleration, set the value that
gain appears at MPOF on the Servo Monitor screen.
2260 SV060 G0 Collision When using the collision detection function, set the 0 to 200
TLMT detection collision detection level during the G0 feeding. (Stall [rated]
level If "0" is set, none of the collision detection function current %)
will work.
III - 83
4. Servo Parameters

2261 SV061 D/A output Input the data number you wish to output to D/A 0 to 102
DA1NO channel 1 output channel.
data No.
DA2NO
2263 SV063 D/A output When "0" is set, output is done with the standard -32768 to
DA1MPY channel 1 output unit. 32767
output scale Set other than "0" when you wish to change the
unit. (Unit: 1/256)
Set the scale with a 1/256 unit. When "256" is set,
the output unit will be the same as the standard
output unit.
DA2MPY
:
III - 84
4. Servo Parameters
(2) Standard parameter list per motor for the settings
Motor type
MF23 RF43 RF73 SF52 SF53 SF102 SF103 SF202
No. Abbrev. Parameter name
SV001 PC1 Motor side gear ratio Set the motor side gear ratio in PC1 and the machine side gear ratio in
PC2.
SV002 PC2 Machine side gear ratio
When using a rotary axis, set the total deceleration (acceleration) ratio.
SV003 PGN1 Position loop gain 1 33
SV004 PGN2 Position loop gain 2 0
SV005 VGN1 Speed loop gain Set according to machine load inertia.
SV006 - - 0
SV007 - - 0
SV008 VIA Speed loop leading compensation 1364
Current loop Q axis leading
SV009 IQA 4096 8192 8192 8192 4096 8192 4096 4096
compensation
Current loop D axis leading
SV010 IDA 4096 8192 8192 8192 4096 8192 4096 4096
compensation
SV011 IQG
Current loop Q axis gain 400 384 384 512 256 384 256 384
SV012 IDG
Current loop D axis gain 400 384 384 512 256 384 256 384
SV013 ILMT
Current limit value 400 300 300 700 700 600 700 500
Current limit value during special
SV014 ILMTsp 400 250 250 700 700 600 700 500
operation
SV015 FFC Acceleration feed forward gain 0
SV016 LMC1 Lost motion compensation 1 0
SV017 SPEC Servo specifications
Set the ball screw pitch with an mm unit.
SV018 PIT Ball screw pitch
Set 360 for a rotary axis.
SV019 RNG1 Position detector resolution 8 100
SV020 RNG2 Speed detector resolution 8 100
SV021 OLT Overload time constant 60
SV022 OLL Overload detection level 150
Excessive error detection width
SV023 OD1
during servo ON
SV024 INP In-position width 50
SV025 MTYP Motor type 229E 22E0 22E1 22B0 22C0 22B1 22C1 22B3
Excessive error detection width
SV026 OD2
during servo OFF
SV027 SSF1 Special servo function selection 1 4000
SV028 Compensation function for special
- 0
to 035 functions
SV036 PTYP Regenerative resistor type 1000
- 0
to 046 functions
SV047 EC Inductive voltage compensation gain 70
SV048 EMGrt Vertical axis drop prevention time 0
Position loop gain during spindle
SV049 PGN1sp 15
synchronization 1
- 0
to 064 functions
III - 85
4. Servo Parameters
Motor single unit Standard VIA change region

50 100
<HS-MF> <HS-RF>
40 80
30 60
Standard Standard VIA
HC-RF43
VGN1 20 VGN1 40 HC-RF73 1500
10 20 1000
VIA
0 0 500
1 3 5 7 9 11 1 3 5 7 9 11
Load inertia scale (total load inertia/motor inertia) Load inertia scale (total load inertia/motor inertia)
Standard VIA change region

600
<HC-SF>
500
400 HC-SF202
Standard
VGN1 300
VIA
HC-SF53, HC-SF103
200 1500
HC-SF52
100 HC-SF102 1000
VIA
0 500
Load inertia scale (total load inertia/motor inertia)
III - 86
4. Servo Parameters
4.4 Supplement (Intelligent Servomotor)
4.4.1 Command polarity
When the motor rotates in the clockwise direction (looking from the load side) at the command for the +
direction, the command direction is CW. Conversely, when the motor rotates in the counterclockwise
direction, the command direction is CCW.
This rotation direction can be set with the NC machine parameters. Note that the meaning of the ±
direction will be reversed for some servo parameters according to the motor rotation direction. The
servo parameters affected by CW/CCW are shown below.
SV016 (LMC1), SV041 (LMC2) (When different values are set for SV016 and SV041)
SV031 (OVS1), SV042 (OVS2) (When different values are set for SV031 and SV042)
<Example> If the lost motion compensation amount is to be changed according to the direction, the
compensation amount at the quadrant changeover point of each arc where the lost motion
compensation is applied will be as shown below according to the command polarity.
CW CCW C: The X axis command +Y D: The Y axis command

direction changes from direction changes from
A X: SV041 X: SV016 the - to + direction. the + to - direction.
B Y: SV016 Y: SV041
C X: SV016 X: SV041 -X +X
A: The X axis command
D Y: SV041 Y: SV016 direction changes from
B: The Y axis command -Y the + to - direction.
direction changes from
4.4.2 Limitations to electronic gear setting value
The intelligent servomotor has internal electronic gears. The command value from the NC is converted
into a detector resolution unit to carry out position control. The electronic gears are single gear ratios
calculated from multiple parameters as shown below. However, each value (ELG1, ELG2) must be less
than 32767.
If the value overflows, the initial parameter error (alarm 37) or error parameter No. 101 will be output.
If an alarm occurs, the mechanical specifications and electrical specifications must be revised so that
the electronic gears are within the specifications range.
Reduced fraction of
ELG1 PC2 × RANG
ELG2 = PC1 × PIT × IUNIT (reduced fraction)
RANG = RNG1 = RNG2

IUNIT = 2/NC command unit (µm)
1µm : IUNIT = 2, 0.1µm: IUNIT = 20

ELG1 ≤ 32767
ELG2 ≤ 32767
III - 87
4. Servo Parameters
4.4.3 Intelligent Servomotor D/A Output Function
<Outline>
This function, which D/A outputs various control data, is built into the intelligent servomotor.
<Output specifications>
No. of channels : 1 channel
Output cycle : 888µs (minimum value)
Output precision : 8 bit
Output voltage : 0V to 2.5V to 5V
Output pin :
Magnification setting : ±1/256 to ±128-fold
<Output function>
Offset amount adjusting function
Output clamp function
Low pass filter function
<Output data No.>

Set the required output data No. in SV061.
Output
No. Output data Standard output
cycle
0 0V test output For offset adjustment Output
No. Output data Standard output
cycle
1 Speed feedback 2000 (r/min)/1V 888µs
2 Current feedback Rated (stall) 888µs
current/0.5V 21 Motor load level 100%/1.25V 113.7ms
3 Speed command 2000 (r/min)/1V 888µs 22 Drive unit load level 100%/1.25V 113.7ms
4 Current command Rated (stall) 23 Regeneration load 100%/1.25V 910.2ms
current/0.5V level
5 V phase current value 40A/V 888µs 24 PN bus voltage 200V/V (1/200) 888µs
6 W phase current value 40A/V 888µs 25 Speed integral item - 888µs
7 Estimated disturbance Rated (stall) 888µs 26 Cycle counter 2.5V to 3.75V 888µs
torque current/0.5V (resolution unrelated)
8 - 27 -
9 - 28 -
10 - 29 -
11 Position droop 4mm/V 3.55ms 30 -
12 Position droop (×10) 400µmm/V 3.55ms 31 -
to
13 Position droop (×100) 40µmm/V 3.55ms 99
14 Feedrate (F∆T) 40000 (mm/min)/V 888µs
100 5V test output - -
15 Feedrate (F∆T×10) 4000 (mm/min)/V 888µs 101 Test output sawtooth 1.25 to 3.75V 888µs
16 - wave Cycle 113.7ms
17 - 102 Rectangular wave 2.5 to 3.75V 888µs
18 - test output Cycle 227.5ms
19 q axis current integral 888µs 103 Setting prohibited
value to
20 d axis current integral 888µs
value
III - 88
4. Servo Parameters
<Setting the output magnification>

Set the output magnification in SV063. Set when output in other than the standard output units is
required.
(Example 1) When SV061 = 5, SV063 = 2560:
V phase current values are output in 4 A/V units to D/A output channel 1.
Abbre-via
Item Name Details Setting range
tion
SV061 DA1NO D/A output Set the output data number for channel 1 of the D/A 0 to 32767
channel-1 output function. 0 to 102 for
data number When "-1" is set, the D/A output of that axis will not MDS-B-SVJ2
be carried out. and intelligent
servo
If this parameter is set to "0" when using the
intelligent servo, SV063 will function as the offset
amount.
SV063 DA1MPY D/A output Set the output data magnification for channel 1 of the -32768 to 32767
channel-1 output D/A output function.
magnification The output magnification will be the setting value/
256.
If "0" is set, the output magnification will be 1-fold, in
the same manner as when "256" is set.
<Setting the offset amount>

Used when fine tuning of the output voltage zero level is required. The output magnification when the
data No. is "0" will become the offset amount. After setting the offset, set the data No. to a value
other than "0", and do not let the value become "0" again.
When the intelligent servomotor power is turned OFF, the offset value will be reset. (The value will
not be reset when the NC power is turned OFF.)
Abbrevia-
Item Name Details Setting range
tion
SV061 DA1NO D/A output Set to "0". -32768 to 32767
channel-1
data number
SV063 DA1MPY D/A output Setting can be made in output precision units. While -10 to 10
channel-1 offset observing the output value, set so that the output
amount value becomes 0V.
<Clamp function>
Used when the output values of position droop, etc., exceed the output range and overflow.
10V 10V
Position
droop D/A output range
0V 0V
-10V -10V
Time Time
Overflow setting time Clamp setting time
III - 89
4. Servo Parameters
<Filter function>
The cutoff frequency 140Hz low pass filter can be set.
Abbre-via
Item Name Details
tion
SV034 SSF3 Special servo Select the special servo functions.
function 3 F E D C B A 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
daf1 dac1 mon
bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1

Current command monitor Current FB monitor display
0 mon
display
1
2
3
4 dac1 D/A output ch.1 overflow setting D/A output ch.1 clamp setting
5
6 daf1 D/A output ch.1 no filter D/A output ch.1 filter setting
7
: : :
F
(Note) Set "0" in bits with no particular description.
III - 90
5. Spindle Parameters
5.1 Spindle NC Parameters
Item Details Section
Spindle NC parameters Parameters for control at the NC side 5.1
Spindle parameters Parameters for controlling on the 5.2
(optical) spindle side when serial-connected to
the spindle controller
Spindle-type servo Parameters for controlling on the NC 5.4
parameters side when serial-connected to the NC
axis.
# Item Details Setting range (unit)

3001 slimt 1 Limit rotation For spindle-type servo 0 to 99999 (r/min)
speed
Set the spindle rotation speed in respect to the motor's
maximum rotation speed for gear 00.
(This is used for calculating the acceleration/deceleration
time constant.)
In other cases
Set the spindle rotation speed in respect to the motor's
maximum rotation speed for gear 00.
(Set the spindle rotation speed at the S analog output
10V.)
3002 slimt 2 Limit rotation Set the spindle speed for maximum motor speed with
3003 3 speed gears 01, 10, 11.
3004 4 (Corresponds to S analog output 10V.)
3005 smax 1 Maximum Set the maximum spindle speed with gears 00, 01, 10, 11.
3006 2 speed Set to slimt >= smax.
3007 3
3008 4
3009 ssift 1 Shift speed Set the spindle speed for gear shifting with gears 00, 01, 0 to 32767 (r/min)
3010 2 10, 11.
3011 3
3012 4
3013 stap 1 Tap speed Set the maximum spindle speed during tap cycle with 0 to 99999 (r/min)
3014 2 gears 00, 01, 10, 11.
3015 3
3016 4
3017 stapt 1 Tap time Set time constants for constant inclination synchronous tap 0 to 5000 (ms)
3018 2 constant cycles for gears 00, 01, 10, 11 (linear acceleration/
3019 3 deceleration pattern).
3020 4
III - 91
Relationship between spindle limit speed and spindle maximum speed
Output voltage
(W)
10V
Spindle speed (r/min)

0 smax1 slimt1 smax2 slimt2 smax(n) slimt(n)
Limit speed of gearing 1 (Parameter setting)

Maximum speed of gearing 1 (Parameter setting)
Set 0 for any unused gear.
Relation between the spindle limit speed and the spindle tap time constant
(for the constant inclination synchronous tap cycle)
Spindle speed (r/min) Spindle speed (r/min)
slimt(n)
slimt(n)
slimt2
slimt1 S command
Time (ms) Time (ms)

0
stapt1
Execution time
stapt2 constant
stapt(n) stapt(n)

3021 sori Orientation Set the spindle orientation speed. 0 to 32767 (r/min)
speed Set the speed for when the spindle rotates at the constant
speed.
3022 sgear Encoder gear Set the gear ratio of the spindle to the encoder. 0: 1/1
ratio 1: 1/2
2: 1/4
3: 1/8
3023 smini Minimum Set the minimum speed of the spindle. 0 to 32767 (r/min)
speed If an S command instructs the rotation speed below this
setting, the spindle rotates at the minimum speed set by
this parameter.
III - 92

3024 serr Spindle speed Set the spindle speed arrival detection width. When the 0: Not check
arrival actual spindle speed is greater than the rate set by the 1 to 99 (%)
detection speed set by the command, an upper or lower limit error
width signal is output to the PLC.
3025 sname S command Assign a name to an S command name to spindle, 2nd 0 to 9
name spindle, rotation tool 1 and rotation tool 2.
Set =in one digit for S=××××××.
(Note) Do not assign the same name to two or more
S commands.
3026 sprcmm Spindle Assign the M code for the spindle forward / reverse 0 to 999999
forward/ rotation command.
reverse Assign the M code with the three digits for each of forward
M command and reverse command.
ooo xxx
Code for reverse command
Code for forward command
3027 senc_pno Encoder port Set the port number of a connection card. 1 to 2
number
3028 sana_pno Analog output Not used. Set to "0". 0
port number
(Not used.)
3029 spflg Spindle bit0 1: HDLC connection 00 to FF
connection (Note 1) 0: Analog connection (HEX)
information
bit2 1: Direct connection to encoder
Also set the following parameter.
3027 senc_no
0: Via passing HDLC connection axis
Also set the following parameter.
3238 SP038 SFNC6/bit2 ON
bit3 Sub-motor spindle designation

(Note 1) 1: Sub
0: Main
It is no use specifying sub-motor for the spindle
which the 1 drive unit 2 motor function is invalid.
bit4 1: SPJ Spindle/C axis control valid

(Note 1) 0: SPJ Spindle/C axis control invalid
bit6 1: Hypothetical spindle control valid

0: Hypothetical spindle control invalid
bit7 1: Spindle-type servo valid

0: Spindle-type servo invalid
3030 senc_no Encoder Not used. Set to "0". 0
connection
card number
(Not used.)
3031 sana_no Analog output Designate the analog output R register for outputting the S 0: Not used.
number analog value. Set 1 to 8 for A01 to A08. Set to "0" when 1 to 8 : A01 to A08
not using S analog output.
(Note 1) When using the spindle-type servo, always set "0".
III - 93

3032 smcp_no Spindle MCP Define the MCP channel number and channel axis 1001 to 100F
number numbers in four digits. 2001 to 200F
MDS-D/DH-SP connection c00x 3001 to 300F
c=Channel setting (1 to 3),
x=axis No. setting (1 to F)
3033 spt Spindle Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant in case 0 to 9999 (ms)
synchroniza- that the spindle synchronization commanded speed
tion changes during the spindle synchronization control
acceleration/ (relative/absolute position).
deceleration
time constant
3034 sprlv Spindle Spindle speed synchronizing complete signal turns ON 0 to 4095 (pulse)
synchroniza- when the differ between the commanded value of slave
tion speed (synchronized) spindle speed and both values, actual
arrival level speed of master spindle and that of slave spindle,
becomes the set level or less.
3035 spplv Spindle Spindle speed synchronizing complete signal turns ON 0 to 4095 (pulse)
synchroniza- when the phase difference of master spindle or that of
tion phase slave spindle becomes the set level or less.
arrival level
3036 sptc1 Spindle Set the spindle sped at which the acceleration/deceleration 0 to 99999 (r/min)
synchroniza- time constant is to be changed at the 1st step.
tion multi-step
acceleration/
deceleration
changing
speed 1
3037 sptc2 Spindle Set the spindle sped at which the acceleration/deceleration 0 to 99999 (r/min)
synchroniza- time constant is to be changed at the 2nd step.
tion multi-step
acceleration/
deceleration
changing
speed 2
3038 spdiv1 Time constant Set the magnification of the acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 127
magnification constant between "sptc1" (changing speed 1) and "sptc2"
in case of (changing speed 2) to "spt" (spindle synchronization
changing acceleration/deceleration time constant).
speed 1
3039 spdiv2 Time constant Set the magnification of the acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 127
magnification constant between "sptc2" (changing speed 2) and "sptc3"
in case of (changing speed 3) to "spt" (spindle synchronization
changing acceleration /deceleration time constant).
speed 2
3040 spplr Spindle Set the relative polarity of the spindle motor and the 0: Polarity is positive.
motor/spindle spindle. 1: Polarity is negative.
relative
polarity Motor rotates clockwise and spindle, too:
Polarity is positive.
Motor rotates clockwise and spindle rotates
counterclockwise:
Polarity is negative.
3041 sppst Spindle Set the deviation amount from the spindle standard 0 to 359999
encoder position (machine zero) to the encoder Z-phase. (1/1000°)
Z-phase (The deviation amount should be required with the
position clockwise a positive direction from the front of spindle.)
III - 94
(Note) #3033~#3041 are the parameters required during the spindle synchronization control.
(1) "#3033 spt" (Spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant) follows the larger
set value among the synchronous standard spindle and synchronous spindle.
(2) "#3036 sptc1" (Spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration changing speed 1)
"#3038 spdiv1" (magnification for time constant changing speed 1) to "#3052 spdiv7"
(magnification for time constant changing speed 7) follows the setting value of the spindle
selected by "#3033 spt".
(3) "#3034 sprlv" (Spindle synchronization speed arrival level) and "#3035 spplv" (Spindle
synchronization phase arrival level) follows the set value of slave spindle. However, in case C-axis
is selected for the workpiece axis during hob machining (G114.3), they follow the set value of
master spindle.
(4) "#3040 spplr" (Spindle motor/spindle relative polarity) is valid for each spindle.
(5) When setting these parameters, it is necessary to measure speed control acceleration/
deceleration pattern of the master spindle motor and G/B spindle motor (when using the guide
bushing spindle synchronization function).

3042 GBsp Reference, Designate the master spindle and G/B spindle. 1: Reference spindle
G/B spindle 2: G/B spindle
designation 0: Other
3043 sptc3 Spindle Set the speed of the spindle that carries out the 0 to 99999 (r/min)
synchroniza- acceleration/deceleration time constant change at the 3rd
tion multi-step step.
acceleration/
deceleration
changing
speed 3
synchroniza- acceleration/deceleration time constant change at the 4th
acceleration/
deceleration
changing
speed 4
acceleration/
deceleration
changing
speed 5
acceleration/
deceleration
changing
speed 6
acceleration/
deceleration
changing
speed 7
III - 95

3048 spdiv3 Magnification Set the magnification of the acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 127
for time constant between "sptc3" (changing speed 3) and "sptc4"
constant changing speed 4) to "spt" (spindle synchronization
speed 3
speed 4
speed 5
speed 6
for time constant between "sptc7" (changing speed 7) and
constant maximum spindle speed to "spt" (spindle synchronization
speed 7
3053 syntm Spindle Set the time consumed for the rotation synchronization 0 to 9999 (ms)
synchroniza- control followed by the phase alignment (, which is the time
tion consumed for the spindle to secure the specified state
Constant state after rotation synchronization).
time When spindle synchronization control is executed, the
parameter of the synchronization spindle side is used.
If the setting value is 0 (ms), it will be handled as 2000
(ms).
If the setting value is below 100 (ms), it will be handled as
100 (ms).
3054 syprt Spindle Set the synchronization spindle deceleration speed at the 0 to 100 (%)
synchroniza- rate corresponding to the command speed when carrying
tion out spindle synchronization phase alignment. When
Phase spindle synchronization control is executed, the parameter
alignment of synchronous spindle side is used.
deceleration If the setting value is 0 (%), it will be handled as 100 (%).
rate
3055 sps_1 bit0 Tool spindle synchronization control II (hobbing 00 to FF
machining) compensation selection (HEX)
0: No compensation
1: Compensate hobbing axis delay (advance) with
workpiece axis.
3057 stapbk Not used. 0
3058 spherr Not used. 0.000
3059 sphtc Not used. 0
3060 sfwd_g Not used. 0
III - 96

3061 stap21 Tap rotation Set the 2nd step's spindle rotation speed of synchronous 0 to 99999 (r/min)
3062 stap22 speed (2nd tapping cycle multi-step acceleration and deceleration for
3063 stap23 step) gears 00, 01, 10, and 11.
3064 stap24
3065 stapt21 Tap time Set the 2nd step's time constants of synchronous tapping 0 to 65535 (ms)
3066 stapt22 constant (2nd cycle multi-step acceleration and deceleration for gears 00,
3067 stapt23 step) 01, 10, and 11.
3068 stapt24
3069 stap31 Tap rotation Set the 3rd step's spindle rotation speed of synchronous 0 to 99999 (r/min)
3070 stap32 speed (3rd tapping cycle multi-step acceleration and deceleration for
3072 stap34
3073 stapt31 Tap time Set the 3rd step's time constants of synchronous tapping 0 to 65535 (ms)
3074 stapt32 constant (3rd cycle multi-step acceleration and deceleration for gears 00,
3075 stapt33 step) 01, 10, and 11.
3076 stapt34
3077 stap41 Tap rotation Set the 4th step's spindle rotation speed of synchronous 0 to 99999 (r/min)
3078 stap42 speed (4th tapping cycle multi-step acceleration and deceleration for
3080 stap44
3081 stapt41 Tap time Set the 4th step's time constants of synchronous tapping 0 to 65535 (ms)
3082 stapt42 constant (4th cycle multi-step acceleration and deceleration for gears 00,
3083 stapt43 step) 01, 10, and 11.
3084 stapt44
3088 stap54
3091 stapt53 step) 01, 10, and 11.
3092 stapt54
3096 stap64
3099 stapt63 step) 01, 10, and 11.
3100 stapt64
3104 stap74
3107 stapt73 step) 01, 10, and 11.
3108 stapt74
III - 97

3112 stap84
3115 stapt83 step) 01, 10, and 11.
3116 stapt84
3117 sp_t1 Time constant Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for spindle 0 to 30000 (ms)
3118 sp_t2 for spindle rotation using the S command (spindle control mode =
3119 sp_t3 rotation with S speed operation mode) at the gears (00, 01, 10,11).
3120 sp_t4 command (Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern.)
When "0" is set, it will be handled as 300 (ms).
3121 sut Speed reach Set the speed deviation rate with respect to the Standard setting value:
range commanded speed for output of the speed reach signal. 15 (%)
3122 zrn_typ Zero point bit0 : Z phase detection direction 0000 to FFFF
return 0: Forward direction (HEX)
specifications 1: Reverse direction
bit1, 2 : Orientation return direction

00: Short-cut
01: Forward run
10: Reverse run
bit8 : Spindle/C axis zero point return/deceleration stop

designation
0: Zero point return
1: Deceleration stop
bit9, A : Spindle C axis zero point return direction

00: Short-cut
01: Forward run
10: Reverse run
bitB : C axis zero point return The type where the spindle
deceleration stop position is set as zero point
0: The deceleration stop position is set as C-axis machine
coordinate zero position.
1: The deceleration stop position is set as absolute
position from C-axis zero position (Z phase passed
position).
3123 zdetspd Z phase Not used. -
detection
speed
3130 ori_spd Orientation Set the orientation speed. 0 to 500 (r/min)
speed If "0" is set, it will be handled as 500 (r/min).
3131 ori_sft Orientation Set the shift amount for orientation. 0 to 35999 (1=0.01°)
shift amount
3132 ori_t Orientation Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for spindle 0 to 30000 (ms)
time constant rotation using orientation command. (Linear
acceleration/deceleration pattern.)
III - 98

3140 sc_spd C axis zero Set the C axis zero point return rotation speed. 0 to 500(r/min)
point return If "0" is set, it will be handled as 500 (r/min).
speed
3141 sc_sft C axis zero Set the C axis zero point position. 0 to 359999
point return The shift direction follows “#3122 zrn_typ/bit0”. (1=0.001°)
shift amount
3142 sc_t C axis zero Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for C axis 0 to 30000(ms)
point return zero point return command. (Linear
time constant acceleration/deceleration pattern.)
3160 SscDrSelS Speed monitor Select the spindle belongs to which door group of speed 0000 to 0003 (HEX)
(PR) p door selection monitoring.
0003: Belongs to door 1 and 2 group.
(Note) The speed monitoring is not executed when
SP229:SFNC9/bitF is OFF.
3161 Ssc Svof Speed monitor Set the error detection time of command speed monitoring 0 to 9999 (ms)
(PR) Filter Sp error detection and feedback speed monitoring during servo OFF.
time during The alarm will occur if the time exceeding safe speed or
servo OFF safe rotation speed exceeds the set error detection time.
III - 99
5.2 Spindle Parameters

Parameters indicated as (PR) in the table will be validated when the NC power is turned OFF and ON after
setting.
The spindle parameter setting and display methods differ according to the NC being used. Refer to the
instruction manuals for the NC and each spindle.
Mitsubishi CNC Control Unit MDS-D Series Specifications Manual ･････････IB-1500011

Mitsubishi CNC Control Unit MDS-DH Series Specifications Manual････････IB-1500003
! CAUTION
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13201 SP001 Position loop Set the position loop gain. Set to "33" as a standard. 1 to 200
PGV gain When the setting value is increase, the tracking in respect (1/s)
Non-interpolatio to the command will increase, and the settling time during
n mode positioning can be reduced. However, the impact applied
13202 SP002 Position loop on the machine during acceleration/deceleration will 1 to 200
PGN gain increase. (1/s)
interpolation The position loop gain can be selected according to the
mode control mode selection command set with control input 4/
bit 2, 1, 0.
13203 SP003 Position loop 1 to 200
PGS gain spindle Control input 4 (1/s)
synchronization Mode
bit2 bit1 bit0
0 0 0 Non-interpolation
0 0 1 Spindle synchronization
0 1 0 Interpolation
When carrying out SHG control, set SP035 (SFNC3)/bitC

(shgn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit4 (shgs) to 1.
13204 SP004 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13205 SP005 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop gain. 1 to 9999
VGN1 1 Set this according to the load inertia size.
The higher the setting value is, the more accurate the
control will be, however, vibration tends to occur.
The value should be determined to be 70 to 80% of the
value at the time when the vibration stops.
13206 SP006 Speed loop lead Set the gain of the speed loop integration control. 1 to 9999
VIA1 compensation 1 Set to "1900" as a standard. Adjust the value by
increasing/decreasing it by about 100 at a time.
Raise this value to improve contour tracking precision in
high-speed cutting. Lower this value when the position
droop vibrates (10 to 20Hz).
13207 SP007 Speed loop Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed loop, 0 to 32767
VIL1 delay or overshooting occurs in positioning.
compensation 1 Select the control method with SP033 (SFNC1)/bit1, 0
(vcnt).
Normally, use "Changeover type 2".
When you set this parameter, make sure to set the torque
offset (SP050 (TOF)).
III - 100
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13208 SP008 Speed loop Normally, SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 1 to 9999
VGN2 gain 1 (VIL1) are used.
13209 SP009 Speed loop By setting SP035 (SFNC3)/bit1 (vgin), SP035 1 to 9999
VIA2 lead (SFNC3)/bit9 (vgn) or SP035 (SFNC4)/bit1 (vgs) to 1, gain
compensation 2 can be used according to the application.
2 Gain 2 can also be used by setting the speed gain set 2
changeover request (control input 5/bitC) to 1.
13210 SP010 Speed loop Refer to SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 (VIL1) 0 to 32767
VIL2 delay for the procedures.
compensation
2
13211 SP011 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13213 SP013
13214 SP014 Minimum Set the minimum value for the variable excitation rate. Set 0 to 100
PY1 excitation rate to "50" as a standard. (%)
1 Set "0" when using the IPM spindle motor.
If the gear noise, etc., is large, select a small value.
However, a larger value is more effective for impact
response.
• When setting a value "50 or more", check that there is
no gear noise or motor excitation noise, vibration during
low-speed rotation, or vibration when the servo is locked
during orientation stop, etc.
• When setting a value "less than 50", check that there is
no problem with the impact load response or rigidity
during servo lock.
13215 SP015 Minimum Normally, SP014 (PY1) is used. 0 to 100
PY2 excitation rate Excitation rate 2 can be used according to the application (%)
2 by setting SP035 (SFNC23)/bit2 (pyin), SP035
(SFNC3)/bitA (pyn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit2 (psy) to 1.
Excitation rate 2 can also be used by setting the minimum
excitation rate 2 changeover request (control input 5/bitB)
to 1. Refer to SP014 (PY1) for the procedures.
Set "0" when using the IPM spindle motor.
13216 SP016 Phase Set the single rotation position alignment deceleration rate 1 to 32767
DDT alignment for orientation stopping, phase alignment during rotation, (0.1 (r/mn)/ms)
deceleration and for changing the mode from non-interpolation during
rate rotation to spindle synchronization.
If the load inertia is large, decrease the setting.
When the setting value is increased, the orient in-position
and single rotation position alignment will end faster, but
the impact applied on the machine will increase.
To change the deceleration rate only during the rotation
command (command F∆T = / 0), set this parameter
together with SP070 (KDDT).
III - 101
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13217 SP017 Spindle Select the spindle specifications.
(PR) SPEC1 specifications F E D C B A 9 8
1
spm
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
fdir vfb seqh fdir2

Speed feedback forward Speed feedback reverse
0 fdir2
polarity polarity
1
High-speed READY ON High-speed READY ON
2 seqh
sequence valid sequence invalid
3 vfb Speed feedback filter stop Speed feedback filter start
Position feedback forward Position feedback reverse
4 fdir
polarity polarity
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Select the motor series.
D 0: 200V specification IM 2: 400V specification IM
spm spindle motor spindle motor
E 1: 200V specification IPM 3: 400V specification IPM
F spindle motor spindle motor
III - 102
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13218 SP018 Spindle Select the spindle specifications.
(PR) SPEC2 specifications F E D C B A 9 8
2
spsu
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mkch oplp

0
1 oplp Open loop operation invalid Open loop operation valid
2
3
4
Coil changeover function Coil changeover function valid
5 mkch
invalid
6
7
8 spsu Speed setting unit [r/min] Speed setting unit [×4r/min]
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
13219 SP019 Position Set the same value as SP020 (RNG2). 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG1 detector (Refer to the explanation for SP020.) (kp/rev)
resolution
13220 SP020 Speed Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor end 1 to 32767
(PR) RNG2 detector detector. (kp/rev)
resolution
Detector model name SP020 setting value
128 teeth 2000
256 teeth 4000
TS5691
384 teeth 6000
512 teeth 8000
13221 SP021 Overload Set the detection time constant of Overload 1 (Alarm 50). 1 to 15300
(PR) OLT detection time (For machine tool builder adjustment.) (s)
constant Set to "60" as a standard.
III - 103
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13222 SP022 Overload Set the overload 1 (alarm 50) current detection level as a 1 to 200
OLL detection level percentage in respect to the motor short-time rated output (Short-time
current. rated %)
(For machine tool builder adjustment.)
13223 SP023 Excessive error Set the excessive error detection width for the interpolation 0 to 32767
OD1 detection width mode and spindle synchronization. (°)
(interpolation Set to "120" as a standard.
mode, spindle Excessive error detection is not executed, so do not set "0".
synchronization)
13224 SP024 In-position width Set the in-position detection width. 0 to 32767
INP Set the accuracy required for the machine. (1°/1000)
The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy
gets, however, the cycle time (setting time) becomes
longer. The standard setting is "875".
13225 SP025 2nd in-position Use this when detecting a different in-position from the 0 32767
INP2 width normal in-position detection, such as advancing the (°/1000)
in-position signal. The procedure is the same as SP024
(INP). Set to "875" as a standard.
13226 SP026 Maximum motor Set the maximum motor speed. If the actual motor speed 1 to 32767
(PR) TSP speed exceeds the set maximum speed, an overspeed alarm will (r/min)
occur.
13227 SP027 Motor zero Set the motor speed for detecting zero speed. If the actual 1 to 1000
ZSP speed motor speed is less than the set speed, the zero speed (r/min)
detection will turn ON. Set to "50" as a standard.
13228 SP028 Speed detection Set the motor speed for detecting the speed. If the actual 10 to 32767
SDTS set value motor speed is less than the set value, the speed detection (r/min)
will turn ON. Set a value 10% of the maximum motor speed
as a standard.
13229 SP029 Speed detection Set the hysteresis value at which the speed detection 10 to 1000
SDTR reset width changes from ON to OFF. If the setting value is small, the (r/min)
speed detection will chatter easily. Set to "30" as a 30
standard.
13230 SP030 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13231 SP031 Motor type Set the position detector type, speed detector type and motor type.
(PR) MTYP
F E D C B A 9 8
pen ent
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mtyp
ent: Set "2".

pen: Set "2"
mtyp: Set "0".
III - 104
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13232 SP032 Power supply Set the power supply type.
(PR) PTYP type F E D C B A 9 8
amp rtyp
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ptyp

0 ptyp When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power
1 supply are connected, setting below is necessary.
Always set when using the NC communication terminator unit.
2
3 MDS-D-CV MDS-DH-CV
4 External External External External
5 emergency emergency emergency emergency
stop stop stop stop
6
invalid valid invalid valid
7
CV-37 04 44 04 44
CV-75 08 48 08 48
CV-110 11 51 11 51
CV-185 19 59 19 59
CV-300 30 70 30 70
CV-370 37 77 37 77
CV-450 45 85 45 85
CV-550 55 95 - -
CV-750 - - 75 B5
8 Set to "0".
9
rtyp
A
B
C Set to "0".
D
amp
E
F
III - 105
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13233 SP033 Spindle Select the spindle function.
SFNC1 function 1 F E D C B A 9 8
ovs lmc
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
vfct vcnt

0 00: Delay compensation 10: Delay compensation
vcnt changeover invalid changeover type 2
1 01: Delay compensation 11: Delay compensation
changeover type 1 changeover type 2
2
3
4 00: Jitter compensation 10: Jitter compensation 2
vfct invalid pulse
5 01: Jitter compensation 1 11: Jitter compensation 3
pulse pulse
6
7
8 Set the compensation amount with SV048 (LMC1) and SP041
lmc (LMC2).
9
10: Lost motion compensation type 2 start
Other than 10: Lost motion compensation type 2 stop
A Set the compensation amount with SP043 (OVS1) and SP042

ovs (OVS2).
B 11: Overshoot compensation type 3 start
Other than 11: Overshoot compensation type 3 stop
C
D
E
F
III - 106
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13234 SP034 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC2 function 2
F E D C B A 9 8
nfd5 nfd4 pwm
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nfd2 nfd3 nfd1 zck

0 zck Z phase check valid (ALM42) Invalid
1 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 1.
3 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
4 nfd3 Notch filter 3 stop Notch filter 3 start (1125Hz)
7 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
8 pwm Standard current control High frequency current control
A nfd4 This is valid only when SP119 is set to 0.
B Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
C
D Set the filter depth for Notch filter 5.
E nfd5 This is valid only when SV120 is set to 0.
F Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
III - 107
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
(PR) SFNC3 function 3 F E D C B A 9 8
shgn pyn vgn
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nopc pyin vgin
bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set Mode
0
Speed loop gain set 1 Speed loop gain set 2
1 vgin
selection selection
2 pyin Excitation rate 1 selection Excitation rate 2 selection Non-
inter-
3
pola-
4 tion
5
6
7 nopc Phase alignment start Phase alignment stop
8
9 vgn
selection selection
A pyn Excitation rate 1 selection Excitation rate 2 selection Inter-
B pola-
C shgn SHG control stop SHG control start tion
D
E
F
III - 108
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
(PR) SFNC4 function 4 F E D C B A 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mksl shgs pys vgs
bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set Mode
0
1 vgs
selection selection
2 pys Excitation rate 1 selection Excitation rate 2 selection
3 Spindle
synchro-
4 shgs SHG control stop SHG control start nization
5
6
Use command coil during
7 mksl Use high-speed coil
spindle synchronization
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
13237 SP037 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13238 SP038 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration 0 to 2250
FHz1 frequency 1 occurs. (Hz)
13239 SP039 Lost motion Set this when the lost motion compensation timing doest not 0 to 2000
LMCD compensation match. (ms)
13240 SP040 Lost motion Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion compensation -32768 to
LMCT compensation in the feed forward control. 32767
non-sensitive When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 2°/1000. (1°/1000)
band Adjust by increasing by 1°/1000 at a time.
III - 109
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13241 SP041 Lost motion Set this with SP048 (LMC1) only when you wish to set the -1 to 200
LMC2 compensation lost motion compensation amount to be different depending (Short-time
2 on the command directions. rated %)
13242 SP042 Overshooting Set this with SP043 (OVS1) only when you wish to set the -1 to 100
OVS2 compensation overshooting compensation amount to be different (Short-time
2 depending on the command directions. rated %)
13243 SP043 Overshooting Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. This -1 to 100
OVS1 compensation compensates the motor torque during positioning. (Short-time
1 This is valid only when the overshooting compensation rated %)
SP033 (SFNC1/ovs) is selected.
Type 3: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bitB, A (ovs) = 11
Set the compensation amount based on the motor
short-time rated current.
Increase in increments of 1%, and find the value where
overshooting does not occur.
Other than Type 3: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bitB, A (ovs) =/ 11
Overshooting compensation (Type 3) is not executed.
When you wish different compensation amount depending
on the direction
When SP042 (OVS2) is "0", compensate with the value of
SP043 (OVS1) in both of the + and - directions.
depending on the command direction, set this and SP042
(OVS2).
(SP043: + direction, SV042: - direction. However, the
directions may be opposite depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be performed in
the direction of the command.
13244 SP044 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
III - 110
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13245 SP045 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
FHz2 frequency 2 occurs. (Hz)
13247 SP047 Inductive Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Set to "100" as 0 to 200
EC voltage a standard. (%)
compensation If the current FB peak exceeds the current command peak,
gain lower the gain.
13248 SP048 Lost motion Set this when the protrusion (that occurs due to the -1 to 200
LMC1 compensation non-sensitive band by friction, torsion, backlash, etc) at (Short-time
1 quadrant change is too large. rated %)
This is valid only when the lost motion compensation
(SP033 (SFNC1/lmc)) is selected.
Type 2: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bit9, 8 (lmc) = 10
Set the compensation amount based on the motor
short-time rated current.
Set a value double the friction torque as a standard. The
compensation amount will be 0 if "0" is set.
Other than type 2: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bit9, 8 (lmc) = / 10
Lost motion compensation (Type 2) is not executed.
When you wish different compensation amount depending
on the direction
When SP041 (LMC2) is "0", compensate with the value of
SP048 (LMC1) in both of the + and - directions.
depending on the command direction, set this and SP041
(LMC2).
(SP048: + direction, SP041: - direction. However, the
directions may be opposite depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be performed in
the direction of the command.
13249 SP049 Acceleration When a relative error in the synchronous control is large, 0 to 999
FFC rate feed apply this parameter to the axis that is delaying. (%)
forward gain The standard setting value is "0". For the SHG control, set to
"100".
To adjust a relative error in acceleration/deceleration,
increase the value by 50 to 100 at a time.
13250 SP050 Torque offset Set the unbalance torque. -100 to 100
TOF (Short-time
rated %)
III - 111
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13251 SP051 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13252 SP052 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13253 SP053 Excessive error Set the excessive error detection width for the 0 to 32767
ODS detection width non-interpolation mode. (°)
(non-interpola- <Standard setting value>
tion mode) ODS = Maximum motor speed [r/min]×60/PGV/2
Excessive error detection is not executed, so do not set "0".

13254 SP054 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13255 SP055 Max. gate off Set a length of time from the point when the emergency stop 0 to 20000
EMGx delay time after is input to the point when READY OFF is compulsorily (ms)
emergency stop executed.
Normally, set the same value as the absolute value of
SP056.
13256 SP056 Deceleration Set the time constant used for deceleration control during -20000 to
EMGt time constant at emergency stop. Set the time to stop from the maximum 20000
emergency stop motor speed (TSP). (ms)
When executing the synchronous operation, put the minus
sign to the settings of both of the master axis and slave axis.
13257 SP057 Spindle side Set the number of teeth on the spindle side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRA1 gear ratio 1 selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5) is set to 00.
13258 SP058 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13259 SP059 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13260 SP060 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13261 SP061 Motor side gear Set the number of teeth on the motor side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRB1 ratio 1 selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5) is set to 00.
13262 SP062 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13263 SP063 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
III - 112
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13264 SP064 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13265 SP065 Torque limit 1 Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 0 to 999
TLM1 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to 001. (Short-time
rated %)
rated %)
rated %)
rated %)
13269 SP069 Phase Set the width for completing phase alignment during 0 to 32767
PCMP alignment rotation, and for single rotation position alignment when (1°/1000)
completion changing the mode from non-interpolation to spindle
width synchronization while rotating.
Set the rotation error required of the machine.
The rotation error will decrease when the setting value is
decreased, but the cycle time (settling time) will increase.
13270 SP070 Phase Set the scale for SP016 (DDT) only when the deceleration 0 to 255
KDDT alignment rate is to be changed during a rotation command (command (1/16-fold)
deceleration F∆T = / 0).
rate scale The single rotation position alignment will be completed
faster when the setting value is increased, but the impact
applied on the machine will increase. Set to "0" when not
using this function.
13271 SP071 Variable The deceleration time can be 0 to 999
DIQM current limit adjusted by changing the (%)
100%
during current limit value during (TMLR)
deceleration, deceleration according to the
lower limit motor speed. DIQM
value As shown on the right, set the

13272 SP072 Variable lower limit rate of the current 0 DIQN Motor speed 1 to 32767
DIQN current limit limit in SP071 (DIQM), and (r/min)
during use this with SP072 (DIQN).
deceleration, When DIQM is set to 100%, the current limit value for
break point deceleration (TMRL) set in the motor constants will be
speed applied.
III - 113
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13273 SP073 Variable speed If noise is bothersome during 0 to 100
VGVN gain target high-speed rotation, the state (%)
value can be improved by lowering VGN1
(VGN2)
13274 SP074 Variable speed the speed loop gain at high VGVN
0 to 32767
VGVS gain change speeds. (r/min)
start speed As shown on the right, set
the speed loop gain rate for 0 VGVS VLMT
the overspeed detection (VLMT= Maximum motor speed×1.15)
speed in SP073 (VGVN),

and use this with SP074
(VGVS).
The overspeed detection speed (VLMT) is 115% of the
maximum motor speed (TSP).
This function can be used when either VGN1 or VGN2 is
selected.
13275 SP075 Slip Adjust the slip frequency scale for deceleration. 0 to 255
DWSH compensation Normally, set this to "0". (1/16-fold)
scale during (For machine tool builder adjustment)
regeneration
High-speed
coil
13276 SP076 Slip Adjust the slip frequency scale at deceleration when using 0 to 255
DWSL compensation the low-speed coil. (1/16-fold)
scale during Normally, set this to "0".
regeneration (For machine tool builder adjustment)
Low-speed coil
13277 SP077 Q axis current Set the current loop gain. 1 to 20480
IQA advance When changing the coils, set the current loop gain for when
compensation the high-speed coil is selected.
13278 SP078 D axis current The setting value is determined by the electrical
IDA advance characteristics, so the setting value is fixed for the motor
compensation being used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
13279 SP079 Q axis current (For machine tool builder adjustment) 1 to 8192
IQG gain
13280 SP080 D axis current
IDG gain
13281 SP081 Q axis current Set the current loop gain for when the coil is changed and 1 to 20480
IQAL advance the low-speed coil is selected.
compensation The setting value is determined by the electrical
Low-speed coil characteristics, so the setting value is fixed for the motor
13282 SP082 D axis current being used.
IDAL advance Set the value given in the axis parameter list.
compensation (For machine tool builder adjustment)
Low-speed coil
13283 SP083 Q axis current 1 to 8192
IQGL gain
Low-speed coil
13284 SP084 D axis current
IDGL gain
Low-speed coil
III - 114
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13285 SP085 Lost motion Set the machine system's spring constant when using lost 0 to 32767
LMCk compensation motion compensation type 3.
3 spring When not using, set to "0".
constant
13286 SP086 Lost motion Set the machine system's viscous coefficient when using lost 0 to 32767
LMCc compensation motion compensation type 3.
3 viscous When not using, set to "0".
constant
FHz4 frequency 4 occurs. (Valid at 50 or more) (Hz)
FHz5 frequency 5 occurs. (Valid at 50 or more) (Hz)
13291 SP091 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13312 SP112
13313 SP113 Current Set the current command value for when open loop control 0 to 999
OPLP command is valid. (Short-time
value for open A "0" setting is the same as a "50" setting. rated %)
loop Set "0" when not using this function.
Open loop control is valid when SP018 (SPEC2)/bit1 (oplp)
is set to 1.
13314 SP114 Coil Set the time to cut off the gate when turning the coil 0 to 3500
MKT changeover changeover contactor OFF and ON. (ms)
gate cutoff Set a value longer than the coil changeover contactor's
timer OFF/ON time.
13315 SP115 Coil Set the time to limit the current immediately after the gate is 0 to 3500
MKT2 changeover turned ON when the coil changeover contactor ON/OFF is (ms)
current limit completed.
timer Set to "25" as a standard.
13316 SP116 Coil Set the value to limit the current immediately after the gate is 0 to 999
MKIL changeover turned ON when the coil changeover contactor ON/OFF is (Short-time
current limit completed. rated %)
value Set to "120" as a standard.
13317 SP117 Excessive Set the time to detect the speed excessive error alarm. 0 to 60
SETM speed Set the time required of the machine. (s)
deviation timer Set to "12" as a standard.
13318 SP118 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
III - 115
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13319 SP119 Notch filter Set the notch filter target attenuation amount and damping 0 to 32767
FSP4 specifications coefficient.
4 Add a value 10000-fold the damping coefficient to the target
13320 SP120 Notch filter attenuation rate -dB absolute value, and set.
FSP5 specifications The setting range of each coefficient is as follows.
5 Damping coefficient: 0.01 to 1.00 (0.01 increments)
When 0 is set, the value is 1.00.
Target attenuation amount: -80dB to -1dB (1dB
incremnets)
When 0 is set, the value is -80dB.
(Example) To set target attenuation amount to -40dB and
damping coefficient to 1.00
1.00 × 10000 + ABS (-40) = 10040
When using nfd4 or ndf5 of SP034, set "0".
13321 SP121 Magnetic pole This is used for the initial magnetic pole detection when the 0 to 32767
MP Kpp detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
position loop Set the position loop gain in the magnetic pole detection
gain loop.
Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
MP Kvp detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
speed loop Set the speed loop gain in the magnetic pole detection loop.
gain Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
MP Kvi detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
speed loop Set the speed loop advance compensation in the magnetic
advance pole detection loop.
compensation Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
ILMTsp detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON. (Short-time
current limit Set the current limit value in the magnetic pole detection rated %)
value loop.
Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
13325 SP125 D/A output Input the data number you wish to output to D/A output 0 to 4
DA1NO channel 1 channel.
data No.
13326 SP126 D/A output
DA2NO channel 2
data No.
13327 SP127 D/A output Set the output scale as a 1/100 unit. -32768 to
DA1MPY channel 1 The same scale as "100" is applied when "0" is set. 32767
output scale (1/100-fold)
13328 SP128 D/A output
DA2MPY channel 2
output scale
III - 116
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13329 SP129 Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (High-speed
(PR) coil)
: : The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical
13360 SP160 and electrical characteristics and specifications, so normally
(PR) set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
13365 SP165 Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (Low-speed
(PR) coil)
: : The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical
13392 SP192 and electrical characteristics and specifications, so normally
(PR) set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
ovsn
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Set the non-sensitive band for overshooting compensation type
D 3 with a 2µm unit.
ovsn When using feed forward control, set the non-sensitive band for
E the model position loop to ignore the model overshooting. Set
F to 2µm (0001) as a standard.
III - 117
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
III - 118
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13427 SP227 Servo Select the servo functions.
SFNC7 function 7
F E D C B A 9 8
dis
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
lmc3 lmct

0 lmct adjustment time adjustment time
measurement invalid measurement valid
1 lmc3
stop start
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Digital signal input selection
D 0 : No signal
dis 1 : Safety observation function door state signal
E 2 to F : Setting prohibited
F
III - 119
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
irms

0 irms Normal load meter display Effective motor current display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
III - 120
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
ssc
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
Safety observation function Safety observation function
F ssc
invalid valid
III - 121
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
iqflt

00: Current command filter invalid
0
iqflt 01: Current command filter small
10: Current command filter large
1 11: Setting prohibited
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
III - 122
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
III - 123
Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
13433 SP233 Voltage When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical 0 to 255
IVC non-sensitive non-energized time will be compensated. (%)
band When "0" is set, a 100% compensation will be performed.
compensation Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value 100%.
If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may be
generated.
13434 SP234 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13434 SP236
13437 SP237 Torque Set the filter for the torque command. Set to "0" when not 0 to 4500
(PR) TCF command using this function. (Hz)
filter The standard value is "500" when using the motor end
detector TS5690 or TS5691.
13438 SP238 Safety Set the safe speed at the spindle end when using the safety 0 to 18000
SSCFEE observation observation function. (°/min)
D safe speed Set to "0" when not using this function.
13439 SP239 Safety Set the safe motor rotation speed when using the safety 0 to 32767
SSCRP observation observation function. (r/min)
M safe rotation
When FB speed which is 1 or more (r/min) faster than the
speed
setting value is detected, the alarm will occur.
III - 124
5.3 Supplement
5.3 Supplement
(1) D/A output specifications

Item Explanation
Number of
2ch
channels
Output cycle 888µs (min. value) CN9 connector
Output precision 12bit Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 LG 11 LG
Output voltage 2 12
0V to 2.5V to +5V
range 3 13
Output scale -32768 to 32767% 4 14
setting (1% increments) 5 15
6 16
CN9 connector 7 17
MO1 = 9 pin 8 18
Output pins
MO2 = 19 pin 9 MO1 19 MO2
GND = 1, 11 pin 10 20
(2) Setting the output data

Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
# No. Abbrev. Parameter name
13125 SP125 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
13126 SP126 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.
No. Details Output unit

0 Motor speed 1000(r/min)/V
1 Current command 100%/V
2 Current feedback 100%/V
3 Position droop 1mm/V
4 Command F∆T 1mm/0.8ms/V
5
6
7
8
9
10
III - 125
5.4 Spindle-Type Servo Parameters
5.4 Spindle-Type Servo Parameters
Set the SV001 to SV064 spindle-type servo parameters not described in this section in the same manner as
the normal NC control axis. (Refer to section "4. Servo Parameters".)
(Note) In the bit explanation below, set all bits not used, including empty bits to "0".
After setting parameters indicated with "(PR)" in the table, turn OFF the NC power. The parameter will be
No. Item Details Setting range (unit)

3601 SV001 Motor gear Set the number of motor gears and machine gears. 1 to 30
(PR) PC1 ratio Set the spindle and motor rotation ratio with PC1 and PC2 so that
the following is established:
PC1/PC2 = spindle rotation speed/motor rotation speed
(Example) When motor is 3000r/min, and spindle is 1000r/min:
3602 SV002 Machine gear 1000/3000 = 1/3
(PR) PC2 ratio Thus, set PC1 to 1 and PC2 to 3.
3618 SV018 Ball screw Set the ball screw pitch. 1 to 32767 (mm)
(PR) PIT pitch Set "360" for a rotation axis.
When using spindle-type servomotor control, always set "360".
To set the spindle's maximum rotation speed to 5000r/min or
more, set this to "180".
(Note 1) When SV018 is set to "180", the command rotation speed can be doubled compared to when "360"
is set. However, as the command unit will be doubled, the accuracy for indexing, etc., could be
affected.
(Note 2) When SV018 is changed from "360" to "180", the parameters related to the unit must all be
reviewed.
CAUTION
If SV018 is not set to "360" or "180", the function will not activate correctly. Always set this parameter to
"360" or "180".
III - 126
6. PLC Constants
6.1 PLC Constants
6. PLC Constants
6.1 PLC Constants
# PLC device Item Details Setting range

16000 T0 PLC timer Set the time for the timer used in the PLC 0 to 32767
<10ms/100ms> program (ladder). (×10ms or ×100ms)
: : The 10ms timer and 100ms timer are
: : identified by the command used.
: : (Note) This setting value is valid when
parameter "#6449 bit0" in the
: :
following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to
16703 T703 "0".
(Note 1) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods.
• Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (fixed timer)
• Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable timer)
(Note 2) The fixed timer and variable timer range can be set with the bit selection parameters (#6454bit0 to
bit3).
No. of Bit selection parameter (#6454) Fixed timer/

Range
points bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 variable timer
0 None 0 0 0 0 All fixed timers
100 #16000 to #16099 0 0 0 1
200 #16000 to #16199 0 0 1 0
300 #16000 to #16299 0 0 1 1 Variable timers in
400 #16000 to #16399 0 1 0 0 range on left
500 #16000 to #16499 0 1 0 1
600 #16000 to #16599 0 1 1 0
All points #16000 to #16703 0 1 1 1 All variable timers
III - 127
6. PLC Constants
6.2 PLC Integrated Timer
6.2 PLC Integrated Timer

17000 ST0 PLC integrated Set the time for the integrated timer used with 0 to 32767 (×100ms)
timer the PLC program (ladder).
: :
<100ms INC.> (Note) This setting value is valid when
: : parameter "#6449 bit0" in the
17063 ST63 following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to "0".
(Note 1) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods.
• Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (fixed
integrated timer)
• Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable integrated
timer)
(Note 2) The fixed integrated timer and variable integrated timer range can be set with the bit selection
parameters (#6454bit5 to bit7).
No. of Bit selection parameter (#6453) Fixed integrated timer/
Range
points bit7 bit6 bit5 variable integrated timer
0 None 0 0 0 All fixed integrated timers
20 #17000 to #17019 0 0 1 Variable integrated timers in
40 #17000 to #17039 0 1 0 range on left
All points #17000 to #17063 0 1 1 All variable integrated timers
6.3 PLC Counter

17200 C000 Counter Set the time for the counter used with the PLC 0 to 32767
program (ladder).
: :
(Note) This setting value is valid when
: : parameter "#6449 bit1" in the
: : following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to "0".
17455 C255
(Note 1) Setting the counter setting value from the setting and display unit
The counter C setting value can be set with the following two methods.
• Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (fixed
counter)
• Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable counter)
(Note 2) The fixed counter and variable counter range can be set with the bit selection parameters
(#6454bit4 to bit7).
No. of Bit selection parameter (#6454) Fixed counter/
Range
points bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 variable counter
0 None 0 0 0 0 All fixed counters
40 #17200 to #17239 0 0 0 1
80 #17200 to #17279 0 0 1 0
120 #17200 to #17319 0 0 1 1 Variable counter in
160 #17200 to #17359 0 1 0 0 range on left
200 #17200 to #17399 0 1 0 1
240 #17200 to #17439 0 1 1 0
All points #17200 to #17455 0 1 1 1 All variable counters
III - 128
6. PLC Constants
6.4 PLC Constants
6.4 PLC Constants

18001 R7500,7501 PLC constant Set the value to be set in the data type R -99999999 to
register used in the PLC program 99999999
: : (ladder).
: : Even if the data is set in the R register
: : that corresponds to the PLC side when
this parameter is displayed, the screen
: :
will not change. Enter a different screen
18150 R7798,7799 once, and then select this screen again.
6.5 Selecting the PLC Bit

6401 R7800-Low Bit selection This is the bit type parameter used in the 0: OFF
6402 R7800-High PLC program (ladder). 1: ON
: : this parameter is displayed, the screen
: : will not change. Enter a different screen
: : once‚ and then select this screen again.
: : Some of the parameters following #6449
: : may be fixed according to the usage
: : purpose.
6495 R7847-Low Refer to the PLC Program Development
6496 R7847-High On-board Instruction Manual.
6497 R7848-Low Bit selection This is the bit type parameter (expansion) 0: OFF
6498 R7848-High expansion used in the PLC program (ladder). 1: ON
: : this parameter is displayed, the screen
: : will not change. Enter a different screen
: : once‚ and then select this screen again.
6595 R7897-Low
6596 R7897-High
III - 129
6. PLC Constants
Table: "Contents of bit selection parameters #6449 to #6496"

Symbol
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
name
#6449 Control unit Integrating
Counter C PLC counter PLC timer
0 temperature - - timer T
R7824 L retention program ON program ON
alarm ON retention
#6450 Alarm/ Operator 1 0
Alarm
1 R7824 H - operator - - message message
change ON R type F type ON
#6451 PLC Onboard

GX Developer
R7825 L development editing not Onboard
2 - - communi- -
environment possible ON
cation ON
selection
#6452 Integrated
Counter
R7825 H timer
3 - - (fixed) -
(fixed)
retention
retention
#6453 PLC integrated timer
4 R7826 L Number of variable integrated timer - -
points setting
#6454
5 R7826 H PLC counter number of variable counter points setting PLC timer number of variable timer points setting
#6455
6 R7827 L - - - - - - - -
#6456
7 R7827 H - - - - - - - -
#6457
8 R7828 L High-speed input specification 1
#6458
9 R7828 H High-speed input specification 2
#6459
A R7829 L - - - - - - - -
#6460
B R7829 H - - - - - - - -
#6461
C R7830 L High-speed output specification 1
#6462
D R7830 H High-speed output specification 2
#6463
E R7831 L - - - - - - - -
#6464
F R7831 H - - - - - - - -
III - 130
6. PLC Constants
Symbol
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
name
#6465
0 R7832 L - - - - - - - -
#6466
1 R7832 H - - - - - - - -
#6467
2 R7833 L - - - - - - - -
#6468
3 R7833 H - - - - - - - -
#6469
4 R7834 L - - - - - - - -
#6470
5 R7834 H - - - - - - - -
#6471
6 R7835 L - - - - - - - -
#6472
7 R7835 H - - - - - - - -
#6473
8 R7836 L - - - - - - - -
#6474
9 R7836 H - - - - - - - -
#6475
A R7837 L - - - - - - - -
#6476
B R7837 H - - - - - - - -
#6477
C R7838 L - - - - - - - -
#6478
D R7838 H - - - - - - - -
#6479
E R7839 L - - - - - - - -
#6480
F R7839 H - - - - - - - -
(Note 1) Be sure to set the bits indicated - and blanks to 0.

(Note 2) Parameters #6481 to #6496 are reserved for debugging by Mitsubishi.
III - 131
7. Custom Variables
7. Custom Variables
The contents of the custom variables are indicated for the variable commands in custom programs
9000~9999 provided by the machine tool builder.
The custom variables can be used in common with all the systems. The custom variable data can be set and
changed by operation conducted on this screen.
# Details Display range

800 These indicate the variable numbers and their contents. When the variable data is -999999.9999
: "empty", the data display area will be blank. to 999999.9999
999 Data with a large number of digits (6 of more digits above the decimal point or 4 or
more decimal places) will be exponentially displayed.
25000
:
26199
(Note 1) Program error P241 results when custom variables are used outside the G code macros and
miscellaneous function macro programs.
(Note 2) The custom variables are retained even when the power is turned OFF.
III - 132
8. Macro List
8. Macro List
Designate when calling the user macro program and subprogram call with a specific code (G, M, S, T,
second miscellaneous code).

7201 G [01] <Code> 1 to 255
to to Set up to 10 random G codes from G [01] to G [10] when
7291 G [10] calling the user macro program with the G command.
(Note that the G code used in the system cannot be set.)
<Type> 0 to 3
0 M98 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call
1 G65 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call
3 G66.1 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call
Other M98 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call
<Program No.> 1 to 99999999

Set the user macro program No. to be called.
7401 G200 <Type> 0 to 3
to Same as the G call macro.
7471 G900
Set the 100th place value of the user macro program No.
to be called.
7481 Pcint <Program No.> 0 to 9
Set the 100th place value of the PC interrupt program.
(Note) Set to "0" when there is no interrupt.
III - 133
8. Macro List
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
7001 M [01] <Code> 1 to 9999
to to Set up to 40 random M codes from M[01] to M[40] when
7091 M [10] calling the user macro program (subsystem program)
with the M command.
10001 M [11]
(Note that M96 to M99 and the M codes used in the system
to to
cannot be set.)
10091 M [20]
<Type> 0 to 5
10101 M [21] 0 M98 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call
to to
10191 M [30] 1 G65 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call
10201 M [31] 3 G66.1 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call
to to
4 G144A P∆∆∆∆D0; and equivalent value call
10291 M [40]
5 G144A P∆∆∆∆D1; and equivalent value call
Other M98 P∆∆∆∆; and equivalent value call
Set the user macro program (subsystem program) No. to
be called.
(Note 1) The macro program will be called by the M code set in this screen when the
basic common parameter M call macro (Mmac) is valid.
(Note 2) The M command code value is used as the subsystem identification No. for
a subsystem call (type = 4 or 5).
7102 M2mac Set when calling the user macro program with the second miscellaneous function
command (the address set in the basic system parameter M2name).
(Note) The macro program set on this screen will be called when the second
miscellaneous code call macro (M2mac) of the basic common parameter is
valid.
<Type> 0 to 3
Same as the G call macro.
7302 Smac Set when calling the user macro program with an S 0 to 3
command.
(Note) The macro program set on this screen will be called
when the basic common parameter S call macro
(Smac) is valid.
<Type> 0 to 3
III - 134
8. Macro List
# Item Details Display range (unit)

7312 Tmac Set when calling a user macro program with a T command.
(Note) The macro program set on this screen will be called when the basic common
parameter T call macro (Tmac) is valid.
<Type> 0 to 7
0 M98P_ ; and equivalent value call Macro call is
1 G65P_ ; and equivalent value call carried out
regardless of
2 G66P_ ; and equivalent value call
the No. of T
3 G66.1P_ ; and equivalent value call digits
4 M98P_ ; and equivalent value call Macro call is not
5 G65P_ ; and equivalent value call carried out for
T1 digits, or T2
6 G66P_ ; and equivalent value call
digits.
(Valid only for
G66.1P_ ; and equivalent value call T3 and T4
digits)
Other M98P_ ; and equivalent value call Same as type 0

Set the user macro program No. to be called.
III - 135
9. Position Switch Parameter

The position switch (psw) is used as an alternate switch for the dog switch provided on an axis of the
machine. The position switch uses parameters by which the names of axes and their corresponding
coordinates indicating imaginary dog positions are defined in advance. When the machine reaches the
imaginary dog position, a signal is output to the PLC interface. The position switch thus works as an
imaginary dog switch.
No. Name Details Setting range

7501 #1 axis Position Specify the name of the axis for which the position X, Y, Z, U, V, W,
switch 1 switch 1 is provided. A, B, C etc. axis
axis name address
7502 #1 dog1 Position Specify the imaginary dog positions 1 (dog1) of position -99999.999 to
switch 1 switch 1. 99999.999
imaginary (machine value, radial value fixed) (0.001mm)
dog
position 1
7503 #1 dog2 Position Specify the imaginary dog positions 2 (dog2) of position -99999.999 to
switch 1 switch 1. 99999.999
imaginary (machine value, radial value fixed) (0.001mm)
dog
position 2
7511 #2 Position Same as position switch 1.
: switch 2
7513
: switch 3
7523
: switch 4
7533
: switch 5
7543
: switch 6
7553
: switch 7
7563
: switch 8
7573
III - 136
(1) Operation
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
Hypothetical
dog
dog 1 psw width
dog 2
Set the coordinate position of the position switch using the basic machine coordinate system as a reference.
(The basic machine coordinate system is the machine's unique coordinate system using the position set in
the parameter as the zero point.)
This function is valid only for the axis that has been returned to the zero point after the power is turned ON.
III - 137
(2) Example of setting and executing dog1 and dog2
dog1 and dog2 setting Operation Explanation

dog 1 dog 2
dog1 < dog2 When dog2 is greater than dog1.
dog 2 dog 1
dog1 > dog2 When dog1 is greater than dog2.
dog 1
dog2 > machine end When dog2 is greater than the machine end.
dog1 = dog2
When dog1 and dog2 is identical, a signal is
dog1 = dog2
output at the dog1 position.
(3) Position switch signal output

Instead of the dog switch provided on the machine axis, the coordinate values indicating imaginary dog
positions (dog1 and dog2) on the coordinate axis of the axis name preset with axis are set with the
position switches (PSW1 to PSW8). When the machine reaches the position, the signal is output to the
device corresponding to the PLC interface.
<For system 1 ($1)>

Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
7501 psw1 Position switch 1 When the machine reaches the set value, a signal is -99999.999 to
output to device X1D00. 99999.999 (0.001mm)
7511 psw2 Position switch 2 When the machine reaches the set value, a signal is
output to device X1D01.
The device that outputs the signal corresponds to each position switch (psw1 to psw8) in each system
as shown below.
Position Device outputting signal ($1: system 1)
switch $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 $8
psw1 X1D00 X1D20 X1D40 X1D60 X1D80 X1DA0 X1DC0 X1DE0
to to to to to to to to to
psw8 X1D07 X1D27 X1D47 X1D67 X1D87 X1DA7 X1DC7 X1DE7
III - 138
10. Machine Error Compensation
10.1 Function Outline

Machine error compensation includes two independent functions: memorized pitch error compensation and
memorized relative position compensation.
(1) Memorized pitch error compensation

According to the specified parameters, this method compensates an axis feed error caused by a ball
screw pitch error, etc.
With the reference point defined as the base, set the compensation amount in the division points
obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates. (See Fig. 1)
The compensation amount can be set by either the absolute or incremental system.
Select the desired method with the #1308:Pinc. Machine position is compensated between division
points n and n+1 as much as compensation amount between them by linear approximation.
Real machine
position
Ideal machine
position
Real machine position for

which no compensation
has been made
Command machine
S S S position
Reference position
Compensation S: Division point
Compensation amount
amount between
division points
S S S Command machine position

n n+1 n+2
Fig. 1 Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position
III - 139
(2) Memorized relative position compensation

This method, according to the parameters specified in advance, compensates the relative position error
between two orthogonal axes caused by deflection of the moving stand.
For this, as shown in Fig. 2, specify the compensation amount in the compensation axis direction in the
division points obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates of the base axis.
The base axis is one of the two orthogonal axes to which relative position compensation applies. This
axis is used as the criterion for relative-error measurement. The compensation axis is the coordinate
axis that is orthogonal to the base axis. The compensation is actually made for this coordinate axis.
The section between division points n and n+1 is compensated smoothly by linear approximation.
Actual machine position

of compensation axis
Actual machine position for

which no compensation
has been made
S: Division point
Command machine
S S S position along base axis
Reference position n n+1 n+2
T T T Command machine position
Compensation amount
Compensation between division points
amount
Fig. 2 Relationship between base and compensation axes
III - 140
(Base common parameter)

# Item Details Setting range
1308 Pinc Machine error Specify whether the incremental volume method or 0: Absolute volume
(PR) offset increment absolute volume method is to be used to set method
method machine error offset data. 1: Incremental volume
method
Machine error compensation <1st axis>

4001 cmpax Basic axis 1) For pitch error compensation‚ set the name of Part system No. and
the axis and system No. to be compensated. axis address, such as
2) For relative position compensation‚ set the X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B,
name of the axis to be the base axis. C
4002 drcax Compensation 1) For pitch error compensation‚ set the same axis Part system No. and
axis name and system No. as #4001 cmpax. axis address, such as
2) For relative position compensation‚ set the X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B,
name of the axis to be actually compensated. C
4003 rdvno Division point Set the division point compensation No. 1 to 1536
number at corresponding to the reference point position of the
reference point basic axis. In actual use, this is the reference point
position and there is no corresponding division point (#4301 to #5836)
compensation No. Set a number that is
decremented by 1.
4004 mdvno Division point Set the division point compensation No. to the
number at the farthest negative side from the basic axis' reference
most negative point.
side
4005 pdvno Division point Set the division point compensation number to the
number at the farthest positive side from the basic axis' reference
most positive point.
side
4006 sc Compensation Set the scale of the compensation amount set in 0 to 99
scale factor the compensation No. (in compensation amount
table). When the compensation scale is set to "1",
the compensation amount unit will be the same as
the output unit. Compensation amount unit = output
unit ∗ compensation scale
4007 spcdv Division interval Set the interval to divide the basic axis. 0 to 9999999
Linear axis
Input Rotation
unit Machine Machine axis
constant metric constant inch
A 0.01mm 0.001inch 0.01°
B 0.001mm 0.0001inch 0.001°
C 0.0001mm 0.00001inch 0.0001°
(Note) If the division interval is set to "0",

compensation will not be executed.
There is no limit to the minimum value for
the division interval, but appropriate data
allowing for the machine's stroke, etc.,
should be set.
III - 141
10.2 Setting Compensation Data
Machine error data

4301 Set the compensation amount for each axis. -128 to 128
: The actual
compensation amount
: will be the value
: obtained by multiplying
5836 the setting value with
the compensation
scale.
Compensation data can be set according to either absolute or incremental system.

"1308:Pinc" 0: Absolute system
1: Incremental system
(1) Absolute system

Feed from the reference point to each division point is executed as shown in Fig. 3.
The following is obtained at this time. Set it as the compensation amount.
(Specified position - Real machine position) × 2 (Unit of output)
For example, assume that the feed from the reference point to the +100mm position is executed. Also,
assume that the real machine position is 99.990mm. In this case, the following value is defined as the
compensation amount used at the +100mm position:
(100000 - 99990) × 2 = 20 pulses
The resultant value is defined as the compensation amount. Assume that the real machine position
resulting when feed to the -100mm position is executed, is -99.990mm. In this case, the following value
is defined as the compensation amount used at the -100mm position:
(-100000 - (-99990)) × 2 = -20 pulses
-100
Compensation
amount: 20 pulses
(10µm)
-99.990
+99.990 Compensation
amount: -20 pulses
(-10µm)
+100
Fig. 3
III - 142
(2) Incremental system

Fig. 4 contains a machine position that is placed in the positive direction with respect to the reference
point. Assume that feed from division n-1 to n (division interval) is executed. In this case, the following
value is defined as the compensation amount:
(Division interval - Actual movement distance) × 2 (Unit of output)
Fig. 5 contains a machine position that is placed in the negative direction with respect to the reference
point. Assume that feed from division point n+1 to n by the division interval is executed. In this case‚ the
following value is defined as the compensation amount:
(Division interval + Actual movement distance) × 2 (Unit of output)
1
n n+1
n: Division point compensation number

1: Division interval
n-1 n
1
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
Unit : Unit of output

Range : -128 to 127
(Note) The unit of output is used as the unit of setting. The actual unit of compensation pulses
depends on the compensation scale factor.
III - 143
10.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis
(1) When the range compensated is on both sides of the reference point
Compensation amount (1) (3) (-3) (-2) (0) (3)

in incremental system
Error
4301 4302 4303 3 4304 4305 4306
2 Actual machine
position that is not
1 compensated
Basic axis'
-1 command
machine position
-2
-3
(3) (-2)
Compensation amount (0) (-2)
in absolute system (-1) (1)
Division point number 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 rdvno 4303
Specified machine position -300.000 -200.000 -100.000 100.000 200.000 300.000 mdvno 4301
Real machine position -299.999 -200.000 -100.003 100.002 200.002 299.999 pdvno 4306
Compensation Incremental 2 6 -6 -4 0 6
amount Absolute -2 0 6 -4 -4 2
If the setting range (mdvno to "pdvno") is exceeded, the compensation will be based on compensation
amount at "mdvno" or "pdvno".
III - 144
(2) When the range compensated is only the positive range:
Compensation amount (-2) (1) (0) (3) (1)

Error 3 4315
4313 4314 4316 4317
Basic axis'
-1 command
machine position
-2
-3
(-2) Actual machine

position that is
Compensation amount (-1)
not compensated
in absolute system (-1)
(2)
(3)
Division point number 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 rdvno 4312
Compensation Incremental -4 2 0 6 2 mdvno 4313
amount Absolute -4 -2 -2 4 6 pdvno 4317
If the machine position exceeds "pdvno", the compensation will be based on the compensation amount
at "pdvno". If the machine position is negative in this case, no compensation will be executed.
(3) When the range compensated is only the negative range:
Compensation amount
(-1) (1) (3) (1) (0) (–3)
Error
4325 4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 3
Actual machine
2
compensated
1
Basic axis'
-1
command
machine
position -2
-3
(3)
(3)
(2)
(-1)
in absolute system (-1)
Compensation Incremental -2 2 6 2 0 -6 mdvno 4325
amount Absolute -2 -4 -2 4 6 6 pdvno 4330
If the machine position exceeds "mdvno", the compensation will be based on compensation amount at
"mdvno".
III - 145
(4) When compensation is executed in a range that contains no reference point:
Compensation
(-1) (-1) (3) (1)
amount in
incremental system
Error 3 4337 4338 4340
4335 4336 4339
2
Actual machine
1 position that is not
compensated
Basic axis'
-1 command
machine position
-2
-3
(-1)
Compensation (-2)
amount in absolute (1)
system (2)
Compensation Incremental 0 0 -2 -2 6 2 mdvno 4336
amount Absolute 0 0 -2 -4 2 4 pdvno 4340
In this case, the compensation is executed in the range from "mdvno" to "pdvno". This setting rule
applies also when the compensation is executed in a range which contains negative machine positions
and no reference point.
III - 146
10.4 Example in Using a Rotation Axis as the Base Axis
10.4 Example in Using a Rotation Axis as the Base Axis
Compensation amount
(-2) (1) (0) (3) (1) (-3)
Error
3 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328
1
360°
Basic axis'
-1
command
machine position
-2
-3
(-2)
(-1) Actual machine
compensated
in absolute system (2)
(3)
(0)
Compensation Incremental -4 2 0 6 2 -6 mdvno 4323
amount Absolute -4 -2 -2 4 6 0 pdvno 4328
In this case, the sum of the compensation amounts set according to the incremental system is always 0.
For the absolute system, the compensation amount at the terminal point (360°) is always 0.
III - 147
11. Absolute Position Setting

In the absolute position detecting system, followings can be confirmed; one is setting parameters to
establish reference point ; the other is the state of initialization set.
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
- Status The execution stage of zero point initialization is displayed. 0, 1, 2, *
(1) When absolute position is lost, "0" is displayed.
(2) When zero point initialization operation is performed, "1",
"2", or "*" is displayed.
<Machine end stopper method>
1: State from setting zero point initialization "#1201" until
pressing against the machine end.
2: State in which data is written on EEROM after the
current limit is reached in machine end hiding.
*: End
<Marked point alignment method>
2: In internal processing state from when the zero point
initial setting "#1201" was set.
*: End
- Machine end <Machine end stopper method> -99999.999 to
Displays the distance from the machine end to previous +99999.999
grid. (Radius value display)
<Marked point alignment method>
Displays the distance from the marked point to previous
grid.
When the grid mask is applied, the distance will be to the
next grid.
This data will be zero-cleared when the power is turned ON.
- Absolute posn ON In this state; ON:
set (1) Zero point initialization can be performed. Absolute posn set
(2) The absolute position detection data "#1201",
"#1202" can be set. OFF:
Absolute posn set
OFF The operation shown above cannot be performed.
1201 Ref position set 0 Zero point initialization and data of "#1202" cannot 0 to 2
be set. These parameters are
1 Zero point initialization can be performed. set to 0 when NC
power is turned off.
2 Data in the basic machine coordinate system can be
set up again.
1202 Ref position Set the distance from the basic machine coordinate system ±99999.999 (mm)
offset zero point to the absolute position reference point. (Radius value display)
This parameter cannot be set when "#1201=0" or if a Z70 or
Z71 absolute position detection alarm occurs.
(Note) Follow the procedures below when setting.
1. Set "2" in the base axis parameter "#1011 abson",
and turn the power ON again.
2. Turn ON the " Absolute posn set ".
3. Set "1" in the "#1201".
4. Set "#1202 ".
5. Turn the power ON again, and carry out a
reference point return.
III - 148
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1203 Move amnt in The machine position when power is turned OFF is compared 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
pwr OFF with the machine position when power is turned ON. If they (Radius value display)
do not match, an alarm "Z70 ABS. ERROR 0004" is output. 0: Equivalent to ball
screw pitch
<In case 0 is set>
0.9 × PIT (Ball screw pitch) × 1000 [µm]
1204 Not used. Set to "0". 0

1205 No stopper Select the method to carry out zero point initialization (press 0: Stopper method
method in the machine end stopper/method to set the 1: Reference point
reference point without using the machine end). method
Always select "0" (stopper method) when carrying out

dog-less reference point return.
1206 Current tim Set the current limit value used during initialization. 0 to 500 (%)
stopper The set value is the ratio of the limit current to the stall
current.
Calculation expression
(Limit current)
(Setting value) = × 100
(Stall current [peak])
1207 Max error width When the machine end stopper method is available, set the 0 to 32767 (mm)
maximum error detection width in pressing during absolute
position setting.
1208 Ref. position Select whether the absolute position reference point will be a 0: Random point
type random point (machine end or reference point) or a grid point. 1: Grid point
If it will be grid point, it is necessary to carry out movement
operations to the grid position.
M achine end
A bsolute position
reference point
G rid point M ach ine

reference
position
"#1 202" (w he n #1208= 1)
"#1 202" (w he n #1208= 0)
1209 Approach Designate in absolute values the distance where the second 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
amount pressing begins (relative distance from the pressing point) in
the automatic dog-less reference point return.
When "0", 2 × grspc (double grid spacing) will be set.
(Note) When the data out of setting range is to be set, it results the error with message "DATA OVER"
III - 149
Revision History
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Feb. 2005 IB-1500126-A First edition created.

Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the
contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some
unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments
regarding the use of this product.
Duplication Prohibited
This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written
permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
MITSUBISHI CNC
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

HEAD OFFICE : MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG., 2-2-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
MODEL 730LUC
MODEL
CODE 008-346
Manual No. IB-1500126 (ENG)

Specifications subject to change without notice.
IB(NA)1500126(ENG)-A(0501)MEE Printed in Japan on recycled paper.

730LUC AlarmParameter Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

730LUC AlarmParameter Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MITSUBISHI CNC

Notes on Reading This Manual

The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered

2. Items related to faults and abnormalities

3. Items related to maintenance

4. Items related to servo parameters and spindle parameters

1. Errors During Operation

1.2 Absolute Position Return Again (M02)

M02 Abs posn return required again

1.3 Interference Check Alarm (M03)

M03 Interfere alarm (command)

1.4 Interference Area Alarm (M04)

M04 Interfere alarm (present area)

T04 Message Collation and stop occurred during automatic operation.

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

(1) Class: S01/S03/S04 Servo alarm

Alarm No. Message Meaning

Alarm No. Message Meaning

Alarm No. Message Meaning

Alarm No. Message Meaning

Separate table (1)

Alarm number when motor

Alarm number when motor

Alarm number when motor

Alarm number when motor

Alarm number when motor

(2) Class: S02 Message: Initial parameter error

(3) Class: S51 Message: Parameter error

(4) Class: S52 Servo warning

Alarm No. Message Meaning

4.1 MCP Alarms

Y02 Message There is something wrong with the data transmission

Y03 AMP unequipped Drive unit mounting

Y12 Message There is something wrong with the data transmission

Y13 AMP unequipped Drive unit mounting

Bit0 1ch Receive not completed

4.2 MCP Warnings

4.3 Safety Observation Alarms

Status1 Message Status2 Details Remedy

4.4 Safety Observation Warnings

5. Messages Related to System

5.1 System Alarms

Z Message A system alarm is displayed.

No. Message Details Remedy

Judgment No. of spindle causing no-signal

No. Message Details Remedy

(1) Abs data error (Z70)

Z70 Message If absolute position data is lost in the absolute

(2) Abs encoder failure (Z71)

Z71 Message If a detector error is detected in the absolute

(3) Initial parameter error (Z25)

Z25 Initial parameter error

5.2 System Warnings

No. Message Details Remedy

(1) HSPRGM conversion error (z30)

z30 HSPRGM conversion error

(2) Absolute position data warning (z73)

z73 Message A warning for the absolute position detection

6. Alarms Related to User PLC

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

8. Auxiliary Axis Alarms

(1) AS01 Aux axis servo alarm

(2) AS02 Aux axis servo alarm

(3) AS03 Aux axis servo alarm